Sharp DV-HR300U DVD Recorder

Sharp DV-HR300U DVD Recorder
DVD RECORDER
WITH HARD DISC
MODEL
DV-HR300U
OPERATION MANUAL
1
•
The region number
for this recorder is 1
IMPORTANT / IMPORTANTE
EZ SET UP (AUTO CHANNEL /CLOCK SET UP)
EZ SET UP (PROGRAMACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA DE CANAL/PUESTA EN HORA DEL RELOJ)
1 Connect Antenna/Cable
to Recorder first.
En primer lugar conecte
la antena/el cable a el
producto.
2 Then, plug into AC Power
Outlet.
A continuación,
enchúfelos al
tomacorriente de CA.
3 Do not press the POWER
button until completion of
EZ Set Up.
No pulse el botón de
ALIMENTACIÓN
(POWER) hasta haber
terminado la EZ SET UP.
• Please read this Operation Manual carefully before using your Recorder.
• Instrucciones importantes de seguridad y guía de operación rápida en español
➝Página 119
4 EZ SET UP complete.
EZ SET UP completo.
Detail: Please see page 26.
Detalle: véase la página 122.
For future reference, record the model and serial number (located
on the rear of the product) in the space provided.
DV-HR300U
Model No.: ————————————
Serial No.: ————————————
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO
NOT REMOVE COVER. NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol warns the user of
uninsulated voltage within the
unit that can cause dangerous
electric shocks.
This symbol alerts the user
that there are important
operating and maintenance
instructions in the literature
accompanying this unit.
“WARNING—FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or
modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer
could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.”
INFORMATION
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
—Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION:
THIS UNIT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
AS THE LASER BEAM USED IN THIS UNIT IS HARMFUL TO THE EYES, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
DISASSEMBLE THE CABINET.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the National Electrical
Code that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, SHARP has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for
energy efficiency. ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.
2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
CAUTION
: Please read all of these instructions
before you operate this product and save these instructions for later use.
ANTENNA LEAD-IN WIRE
Electrical energy can perform many useful functions. This
product has been engineered and manufactured to assure
your personal safety. BUT IMPROPER USE CAN RESULT IN
POTENTIAL ELECTRICAL SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARDS. In
order not to defeat the safeguards incorporated in this
product, observe the following basic rules for its installation,
use and servicing.
GROUND CLAMP
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
ELECTRICAL
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUND CLAMPS
1. Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a
damp cloth for cleaning.
Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water–for
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry
tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.
Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing
serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the
product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product.
Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s
instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
Transportation – A product and cart
combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and
uneven surfaces may cause the product
and cart combination to overturn.
Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to
protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be
blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by
placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface.
This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such
as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or
the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you
are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult
your product dealer or local power company. For products
intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer
to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization – This product is equipped with
either a two-wire polarized plug (one plug blade bigger than the
other) or a three-wire grounded plug (a third pin for grounding).
The two-wire polarized plug will fit only one way into the power
outlet. The three-wire grounded plug will fit only into a grounding-type power outlet.
If the plug does not fit, ask your electrician to replace your
obsolete outlet. Do not modify the plug. To do so will void the
safety feature.
Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention
to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the product.
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection
against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810
of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides
information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and
supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an
antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location
of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes,
and requirements for the grounding electrode. See diagram
below.
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
NEC- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC PART 250, PART H)
15. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.
Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines
or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme
care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or
circuits as contact with them might be fatal.
Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords,
or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of
fire or electric shock.
Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as
opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous
voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel.
Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the product does not operate normally by following the
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
covered by the operating instructions, as an improper
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and
will often require extensive work by a qualified technician
to restore the product to normal operation.
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way.
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.
Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics
as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire,
electric shock, or other hazards.
Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
Heat – This product should be situated away from heat sources
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
3
Contents
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .......................
3
About START MENU .................................... 29
Features .......................................................
6
About START MENU ......................................................
Basic START MENU Operation .....................................
Accessories .................................................
7
Clock Setting ............................................... 30
Precautions about Using This Product .....
8
Auto Clock Setting .........................................................
Manual Clock Setting .....................................................
Automatic Daylight Saving-Time (DST) Adjustment .......
About Hard Disc (HDD) ............................... 10
Recording Format ..........................................................
Unrecordable Material ....................................................
Hard Disc Operation (Recording/Playback/Time Shift
Recording) ...................................................................
Initialization ....................................................................
CPRM (control) Information ...........................................
10
10
10
10
10
About DVD ................................................... 11
Types of Discs that Can Be Used with This Recorder ...
Discs that Cannot Be Used with This Recorder .............
Types of Discs for Recording .........................................
Recording Formats ........................................................
Recording Time ..............................................................
Disc Remaining Time .....................................................
Using the Proper Disc ....................................................
Time display for Recording and Playback
(Video mode only) .......................................................
Unrecordable Material ....................................................
11
11
12
13
13
13
14
14
14
30
31
31
Channel Setting ........................................... 32
Channel Setting .............................................................
Adding/Erasing Channel Memory ..................................
32
32
Display Information ..................................... 33
Content of TV Screen Display ........................................
Checking the Channel ....................................................
Checking Remaining Time of HDD and
Number of Titles ..........................................................
Checking Remaining Time of DVD and
Number of Titles ..........................................................
Switching Front Panel Display .......................................
33
33
33
34
34
Preparation to Operate This Recorder ...... 35
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback ...... 36
Time Shift Viewing .........................................................
Chasing Playback ..........................................................
37
37
Initialization and Finalization ..................... 15
Recording to HDD ....................................... 38
Initialization (Formatting) ................................................
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back
with Other DVD Players (Finalization) .........................
Direct Recording to HDD ...............................................
Setting the Record End Time during Direct Recording
(Simple Recording Timer) ............................................
15
15
39
39
About the Contents of the Disc ................. 15
Recording to DVD ....................................... 40
Title, Chapter and Track .................................................
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case ............................
The Icons Used in This Operation Manual .....................
15
16
16
Loading Disc ..................................................................
Direct Recording to DVD ................................................
Important Information ................................. 17
HDD Recording Mode and Recording Time ...................
DVD-R/RW Recording Mode and Recording Time ........
Setting the Manual Recording Mode (MN) .....................
Disc Precautions ............................................................
Copyright ........................................................................
Cautions Regarding Recording ......................................
17
17
17
Major Components ...................................... 18
Main Unit (Front) ............................................................
Front Panel Display ........................................................
Main Unit (Rear) .............................................................
Remote Control Unit ......................................................
Loading the Batteries .....................................................
Operating a TV Using the Remote Control (Universal
Remote Control) ..........................................................
Setting the Remote Control Code ..................................
18
18
18
19
20
21
21
Basic Connection ........................................ 22
Easy Connection ............................................................
Using Other Types of Video Output ...............................
22
23
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections ..... 24
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (1) ......
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (2) ......
24
25
EZ Set Up ..................................................... 26
Turning the Power On ....................................................
26
Connection Guide ....................................... 27
Selecting the On-screen Display Language ...................
Selecting the TV Terminal ..............................................
Selecting the TV Screen Aspect Ratio ...........................
Advanced Setting ...........................................................
Completing the Initial Setting .........................................
4
29
29
27
27
27
28
28
40
40
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD) ......... 42
42
42
42
Timer Recording .......................................... 43
Easy Recording Guide ...................................................
Timer Recording with VCR Plus+® System ....................
Timer Recording by Specifying Date,
Time and Channel .......................................................
Favorite Program Timer Recording ................................
Timer Program Detail Setting .........................................
Confirm, Change and Cancel a Timer Program .............
43
45
47
49
51
54
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcast
(AV AUTO REC) ..................................... 55
Connecting to a Satellite Receiver, etc. .........................
Recording with AV AUTO REC .......................................
To Cancel the AV AUTO REC Function ..........................
55
55
56
Dubbing (HDD/DVD) .................................... 57
Dubbing Method and Dubbing Types .............................
Limitation during Dubbing ..............................................
Timer Dubbing/Dubbing Immediately (HDD↔DVD)
High Speed Dubbing (HDD→DVD) .............................
Dubbing Titles Recorded as Favorite Program ..............
57
57
59
61
Eliminating Problems (Recording, Timer
Recording, Dubbing) ............................. 62
Contents
HDD Playback .............................................. 64
Enjoying High Quality Sounds ................... 93
Playback ........................................................................
Playback from REC LIST ...............................................
Playback by Selecting Title Number (Direct Playback) ..
Viewing Favorite Programs ............................................
Other Types of Playback ................................................
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an Analog Connection .... 93
Playing Dolby Digital (5.1 Channel) and DTS Audio with a
Digital Connection ....................................................... 93
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a Digital Connection ....... 94
64
65
66
66
67
DVD/CD Playback ........................................ 69
Loading Disc ..................................................................
DVD-R/RW Playback .....................................................
DVD Video Playback ......................................................
Audio CD/Video CD Playback ........................................
Other Types of Playback ................................................
Playback by Selecting with the Menu in the DVD ..........
69
69
70
70
71
73
MP3 File Playback ....................................... 74
To Play Another File (music title) during Playback .........
To Skip the File during Playback ....................................
74
74
Settings During Playback ........................... 75
Function Control .............................................................
75
Simultaneous Recording/Playback
Function ................................................. 77
Viewing the Program Being Recorded from the Beginning
while Recording to HDD (Chasing Playback) ..............
DVD/CD Playback during HDD Recording (Simultaneous
Recording/Playback) ...................................................
Playing Back a Title on the HDD during DVD Recording
(Simultaneous Recording/Playback) ...........................
Viewing Another Program Recorded on HDD while
Recording to HDD (Simultaneous Recording/
Playback) .....................................................................
Recording from External Equipment ......... 95
Recording from a Digital Camcorder Using i.LINK .........
Recording from a Camcorder (VCR) Using an Analog
Connection ..................................................................
95
97
Function Setting .......................................... 98
Basic Operation for REC FUNCTION Setting ................
Basic Operation for VIEW/PLAY SETTING ....................
Basic Operation for ADJUSTMENT Setting ...................
Initialization ....................................................................
Finalization .....................................................................
Basic Operation for INITIALIZE/FINALIZE .....................
99
101
105
106
106
107
Troubleshooting .......................................... 108
Service Information (For the U.S.) ............. 110
On-screen Error Messages ........................ 111
77
Glossary ....................................................... 114
77
Specifications .............................................. 117
77
77
Function Menu ............................................. 78
How to Use the FUNCTION MENU ...............................
78
Editing (HDD/DVD) ...................................... 79
About Editing .................................................................. 79
Editing Procedure .......................................................... 79
Switching between Original and Play List (Play Lists can
be created only for HDD or VR mode) ........................ 80
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD) .......... 81
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title
(ERASE SCENE) .........................................................
Inputting/Changing Title Name
(CHANGE TITLE NAME) .............................................
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) .............
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) .............
Combining Chapters Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) .............................................
Disabling Title Edit and Erase (TITLE PROTECT) .........
Erasing All Titles .............................................................
Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) .......................
81
83
84
85
86
86
87
87
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD) ................... 88
Creating a Play List ........................................................
Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List
(ADD SCENE) .............................................................
Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) ................
Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) ...........
Inputting/Changing Title Name
(CHANGE TITLE NAME) .............................................
Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) .............
Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) .............
Combining Chapters Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS) .............................................
88
89
91
92
92
92
92
92
5
Features
1
A new timer recording system:
“Easy Recording Guide”
• The Recorder is equipped with a high-capacity hard
disc, so you’ll have more chances than ever before
for timer recording, and the new timer recording
system makes this even easier. A schedule grid of
times and channels is displayed on the screen, and
by simply designating cells in the grid with the
remote control, timer programming becomes as
easy as circling your favorite shows in the newspaper. You can also see at a glance which time slots
are already programmed, and avoid any overlap.
2
High-capacity hard disc lets you
record and view series and your
favorite programs*1
• For trendy dramas, series and other shows you
want to watch and record, without missing a week,
use the “Serial Program Timer” feature.
For news and information programs which you
watch everyday and don’t need to store, set
“Overwrite Program Timer”.
• Recorded programs can be viewed by simply
calling them up with the remote control, so there is
no need to search through a lot of programs.
Programs recorded with “Serial Program Timer” can
be batch dubbed onto DVD*2, so you can easily
save your favorite dramas on DVD.
*1
*2
This function is only available with hard disc.
Up to 5 titles can be dubbed in a batch.
3
DVD-R/RW recording/playback
with outstanding compatibility
• This Recorder is compatible with digital recording
on rewritable DVD-RW discs and one-time recordable DVD-R discs. It has two recording formats:
“VR (Video Recording) mode” which has a wealth of
editing functions, and “Video mode” which can be
played back with existing DVD players. This lets
you enjoy recording and dubbing to suit your
purpose.
4
High picture quality design (Used
in all hard disc and DVD modes)
1Progressive scanning playback
High-quality, high-density video with no jagged
contours and no flicker.
2VBR (Variable Bit Rate) recording
Constantly maintains optimal high picture quality by
varying the bit rate (amount of video data) for each
scene depending on the video content (e.g.
whether movement is fast or slow).
6
5
A variety of hard disc t DVD
dubbing functions
1High speed dubbing*3
Enables high speed dubbing from hard disc to DVD
so you can enjoy creating your own video library.
*3
For high speed dubbing, use discs conforming to DVDRW Ver. 1.1/2g or DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4g.
2Rate conversion dubbing
The mode can be selected from 32 levels just like
recording mode. This enables recording at the
optimal picture quality, given the remaining empty
space on the disc.
3Exact dubbing
This automatically adjusts to the optimal record
mode so that the material is dubbed exactly into the
remaining area on the disc.
The time normally required for a program of an hour on
High Speed Dubbing to a double speed compatible disc
Time Required
Recording Mode
Speed
6
FINE
Approx. 2g
Approx. 30 min
SP
Approx. 4g
Approx. 15 min
LP
Approx. 8g
Approx. 7.5 min
EP
Approx. 12g
Approx. 5 min
“Time Shift Viewing”, “Chasing
Playback” and “Simultaneous
Recording/Playback” —functions
you can only get with a hard disc
1Time shift viewing
While you are watching a program, the phone
rings.… At times like this, you can pause the
program being broadcast by pressing a button, and
then watch the rest of the program at your leisure
after you finish your phone call. You can also switch
to the current broadcast scene just by pressing
■STOP/LIVE button.
2Chasing playback
You return home earlier than expected while timer
recording is in progress…. At times like this, you
don’t have to wait for recording to end. You can
immediately view the program from the beginning.
3Simultaneous recording/playback
Even while recording to the hard disc, you can
enjoy playback of a DVD, or programs already
recorded on hard disc. You don’t have to wait for
recording to finish.
Features
7
Comprehensive editing functions
(Only titles recorded on the hard disc or in VR
mode on DVD-RW can be edited.)
1Play list edit
This lets you gather only the needed parts (i.e. a
“Play List”) from a recorded original video (title).
You can rearrange scenes and combine them with
other scenes, or rearrange titles. This is convenient
when you want to dub and save only the necessary
scenes and titles.
2Chapter edit
This lets you divide a title into chapter units during
recording/playback or using the edit screen. After
dividing, a list of recordings (thumbnails) can be
displayed in chapter units, so you can copy, erase
or dub to the play list in chapter units.
3Erase scene
This lets you erase unnecessary scenes. This is
convenient when you want to cut out the commercials in a recorded program before dubbing.
4Batch erasing of titles/chapters
Titles and chapters which become unnecessary
after editing can be batch erased by selecting them
from the list of recordings (thumbnails).
5Edit undo function*4
If you mistakenly erase data during editing, this
function lets you restore it to its immediately
preceding state, just like “Undo” on a PC, so you
can edit worry-free.
*4 Edit undo can only be used once. It only works when
“UNDO” is assigned to a colored button (green) displayed
on the screen.
8
Simple operation and user-friendly
design using a new remote control
1START MENU
Press START MENU button on the remote control,
and display the list of main functions on the screen.
After that, you can operate by using the Cursor
buttons and SET/ENTER button on the remote
control, so this Recorder can be used easily even
by a person who is unfamiliar with operation.
2Colored buttons
The remote control has colored buttons with four
different colors. Functions are displayed in four
different colors on the screen, and the Recorder
can be operated by directly designating these
functions.
3Luminous buttons
Luminous buttons are used for key control buttons
on the remote control so they are easy to see in the
dark.
9
Digital connection (i.LINK) with a
digital video/audio source equipment
• The DV IN terminal allows you to capture, edit and
store material from a digital camcorder equipped
with a DV terminal.
10 MP3 file playback
• This Recorder allows you to playback MP3 files
recorded on CD-R/RW.
*5
11 VCR Plus+ System
• The VCR Plus+ System allows you to program your
Recorder for timer recording simply by inputting the
PlusCode Programming number. The PlusCode
numbers are listed in most newspapers, television
guides, and local CATV listings. Simply by inputting
this PlusCode number, you can program your
Recorder for timer recording, eliminating the need
to input program start time, stop time, channel, date
and other information which is necessary for
ordinary timer programming.
*5 VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The VCR Plus+
system is manufactured under license from Gemstar
Development Corporation.
Accessories
Remote control unit
(RRMCGA198WJSA)
Two “AAA” size batteries
(R-03, UM/SUM-4)
for the remote control unit
Video/audio cable
(QCNW-B557WJPZ)
Round coaxial cable
(QCNW-B656WJPZ)
7
Precautions about Using This Product
Do not use at locations at high
temperature.
Do not place objects on the Recorder.
• If you leave this equipment at a location which rises to an
abnormally high temperature (like the inside of a car with
the windows shut), this may cause deformation of the
cabinet or malfunction. Be very careful not to allow the
area abound the Recorder or discs to reach a high
temperature.
• Do not place any objects, such as vases or lighted
candles on the top of the Recorder.
• Set up at a location where there is adequate space above
the Recorder
• Do not place a TV or other heavy object on the Recorder.
Doing so may result in problems like noise appearing on
the screen, or deformation of the cabinet.
• Do not place the Recorder on any equipment which gets
hot.
• Do not place at a location which is exposed to direct
sunlight, or near a heater. Be careful because doing so
will have an adverse effect on the cabinet and components.
Keep away from magnetic objects.
• Keep the Recorder away from strong magnetic objects.
Handle the Recorder carefully.
• Do not drop the Recorder, or subject it to strong impact or
vibration. Doing so will cause malfunction. Be careful
when carrying or moving the Recorder.
No fingers or other objects inside
• Do not put any foreign object on the disc tray.
When moving or shipping the
Recorder
Do not remove the cabinets.
• Do not remove the Recorder cabinets. Touching parts
inside the cabinet could result in electric shock and/or
damage to the Recorder. For service and adjustment
inside the cabinet, please contact the nearest Sharp
Authorized Service Center.
Do not cover the fan or ventilation holes on the back of the Recorder.
• When setting up the Recorder, do not cover the fan or
ventilation holes on the rear of the Recorder. This will
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction. Be
especially careful of this point when housing the Recorder
in a TV stand or AV rack.
• Do not use the Recorder on carpets, or on a bed or sofa,
or wrap the Recorder in cloth or other material. This will
interfere with the cooling fan and cause malfunction.
Avoid dust and smoke.
• Do not place the Recorder at a location which is unstable,
subject to heavy vibration or where there is a lot of dust or
tobacco smoke. Doing so may cause malfunction or
accidents.
Set up the Recorder so it is horizontal.
• Do not stand the Recorder up vertically or place it upside
down. Doing so will cause malfunction.
8
• Remove the disc before wrapping the Recorder. In case
you will not be using the Recorder for a while, remove the
disc, and turn off the power.
When using the Recorder during
rain or snow
• If you use the Recorder during rain or snow, be careful
not to allow it to get wet.
Dew formation
• Dew may form on the surface of and inside the Recorder
if you suddenly carry it from a cold location to a warm
location, or use it in a cold room where heating has just
been turned on (i.e. on a winter morning). If dew forms,
let the Recorder sit with the power off until the dew
disappears. Using the Recorder with dew formation
present may cause malfunction.(See page 17.)
Precautions about Using This Product
Upkeep of cabinet
• The cabinet surface employs a lot of plastic. Do not wipe
these surfaces with benzene or thinner because this may
cause deterioration or paint peeling.
• In the unlikely event that the hard disc (HDD) malfunctions for some reason, you cannot replace it by yourself. If
you disassemble the Recorder you will void the warranty.
Please contact the nearest Sharp Authorized Service
Center. We cannot provide compensation for data content
if data is lost or not recorded.
Connected equipment
• Read carefully the “Precautions for Use” in the operation
manual for any equipment connected to the Recorder.
Power conservation
• Do not apply volatile liquids like insecticide to the
cabinet. Also, do not allow long-term contact with
materials like rubber, vinyl products or synthetic leather.
Doing so may cause problems like paint peeling.
• Do not affix stickers or tape to the Recorder. Doing so
may cause cabinet discoloration or damage.
• If the cabinet or front panel display gets dirty, gently wipe
it off with soft cloth like flannel. If it is extremely dirty, soak
a cloth in neutral detergent diluted with water, wring the
cloth well, wipe, and then wipe again with a dry cloth.
Using powerful cleaners may cause discoloration,
deterioration or paint peeling. We recommend testing any
cleaners at an inconspicuous location on the Recorder.
• When you are finished using the Recorder, conserve
power by turning power off. If you go on a trip, or
otherwise will not use the Recorder for a long time,
unplug the power cord from the AC outlet to ensure
safety.
Electromagnetic interference
• Do not cover the fan or ventilation holes on the back of
the Recorder. Doing so will interfere with heat radiation
and cause malfunction.
• If you use a mobile phone or other electronic equipment
near the Recorder, video may be disturbed or become
noisy during playback or recording due to electromagnetic interference.
Antenna
• To avoid the effects of radio interference, set up the
antenna at a location away from busy roads, electric
wires for train, electric transmission lines and neon signs.
This is effective for preventing electric shock accidents in
the unlikely event that antenna falls down.
• Do not make the antenna line unnecessarily long, or
bundle it. Be careful because doing so will cause the
picture to be unstable.
• The antenna is exposed to the weather, so be careful to
periodically check and replace it. This will ensure a
beautiful picture. Antennas are particularly susceptible to
damage at locations with heavy smoke and soot, and
locations exposed to sea breeze.
Hard disc (HDD)
• This Recorder records programs onto a hard disc (HDD).
The hard disc is equipped with a safety mechanism to
protect data from impact, vibration and dust. However, to
prevent loss of recorded data, you should be particularly
careful of the following points:
• Do not subject the Recorder to any impact.
• Do not use at a location which is unstable or subject to
vibration.
• Do not move the Recorder while the power is on.
• Do not unplug the power cord from the AC outlet
during recording or playback. First turn power “OFF”,
and then unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
• Do not use at a location with abrupt temperature
variation (variation of more than 50°F [10°C] per hour).
• The Recorder will malfunction if used at a cold location
(41°F [5°C] or less) or an extremely hot location (95°F
35°C] or higher).
• If you carry the Recorder from a cold location to a
warm location, let the Recorder sit for a while before
using it.
If you do not use the Recorder for
a long time
• Failure to use the Recorder for a long time may cause
problems, so turn on power and operate the Recorder
from time to time.
Requests regarding setup
Notes about use
• The Recorder and cabinet may become a little hot,
depending on the use environment when using this
Recorder. This is not a malfunction.
• When unplugging the power cord (to move the Recorder,
etc.), first turn off power (STANDBY indicator on the front
of the Recorder lights up red) to protect the hard disc
(HDD).
• When power is turned on, the fan will rotate to cool the
Recorder.
• Immediately after plugging the power cord into an AC
outlet, or after recovery from a power failure, the unit may
fail to operate for more than ten seconds because the
Recorder is performing system adjustment.
Notes about this operation
manual
• In this operation manual, the terms “the Recorder”, “this
Recorder” or “your Recorder” refer to the “DV-HR300U
DVD Recorder with Hard Disc”.
• The screen displays and Recorder illustrations given in
this operation manual are for explanatory purposes, and
may differ somewhat from the actual screen and Recorder.
9
About Hard Disc (HDD)
This Recorder has a built in hard disc (abbreviated
“HDD”) for recording and playback. Beware of the
following points when setting up and using the Recorder.
Failure to observe precautions may cause damage to
the HDD itself or its content, failure of the disc to
operate, or recording of noise.
• Do not subject to any vibration or impact.
• Do not place at a cramped location which might block the
cooling fan or ventilation port on the back of the Recorder.
• Do not place at a location with severe temperature
variation.
s If the Recorder is set up at a location with severe
temperature variation, dew may form on and inside the
Recorder. If the Recorder is used with internal dew
formation present, this may cause HDD damage or
malfunction. We recommend keeping variation in room
temperature within 50˚F (10˚C) per hour.
• Do not place at a location with high humidity.
• Place the Recorder horizontally, never at an incline.
• When the power is on, do not unplug the power cord from
the AC outlet, turn off the breaker for the area where the
Recorder is set up, or move the Recorder.
s When moving the Recorder, first turn off the power and
then unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.
In the unlikely event that there is some problem like loss
of recorded video or audio content due to a HDD
malfunction, please be aware beforehand that Sharp will
bear no responsibility to compensate for the content
which could not be recorded or edited, for the loss of
recorded or edited video, or for other related direct or
indirect damages.
■ If a power failure occurs
• The content being recorded or timer recorded will be
damaged if power failure occurs.
• The content being played back may be damaged.
■ For important recording
• If the HDD malfunctions, the content recorded on the
HDD may be lost. If you wish to save content permanently, we recommend copying or moving the content
to DVD-RW or DVD-R.
NOTE
• If a message indicating a HDD error is displayed (such as
“CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO ERROR.”) and the HDD has
malfunctioned, you cannot replace the HDD by yourself.
If you disassemble the Recorder, the warranty will
become void. Also, recovery of data is impossible. If
playback is possible, re-record the recorded content onto
a DVD-R/RW disc, and contact your nearest Sharp
Authorized Service Center.
Recording Format
■ HDD recording is done using the variable bit rate
format for more efficient recording.
The following phenomena may occur.
With the variable bit rate format, the remaining amount
which can be recorded may increase or decrease relative
to the display of the remaining amount of HDD space.
• When the display indicates that the remaining amount of
HDD space is low, first delete unnecessary programs,
and then record with an extra margin in the amount of
remaining space.
• Even if you delete a program, the remaining amount may
not increase by the amount of deleted time. When
recording new video, record with an extra margin in the
amount of remaining space.
• With this Recorder, part of the HDD capacity is used as a
system management area.
Hard Disc Operation
(Recording / Playback / Time Shift
Recording)
• If the Recorder is used in a cold location (a location at
low temperature), the drive will only allow live viewing
after power is turned on until the HDD is ready. During
this time, the Recorder will not allow Time Shift Viewing,
recording, display of recording lists or playback of
recorded programs. Please wait until the HDD is ready.
Initialization
• Initialization erases all video recorded on the HDD. Be
sure to dub important recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs
before initializing.
Unrecordable Material
• This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard function
that prevents recording of video software or broadcast
programs that contain a signal that restricts copying in
accordance with copyrights and so forth.
• In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a source
video that occurs partway through recording, recording is
paused at that point. Recording resumes when the copy
guard signal is no longer present, while no recordings will
be made for the part where the copy prevention signal is
present.
10
CPRM (control) Information
• There are 3 types of copy control signals: “Copy Freely”,
“Copy Once” and “Copy Never”.
“Copy Never” programs cannot be recorded on HDD.
When a “Copy Once” enabled program is copied from
HDD to DVD-RW, the video is not copied — it is moved
from the HDD to the DVD-RW (i.e. the content recorded
on the HDD is erased).
About DVD
Types of Discs that Can Be
Used with This Recorder
• The following discs can be played back and recorded
with this Recorder. Do not use an 8 cm (3") adapter (for
CDs).
• Since this Recorder is compatible with the NTSC format,
use discs that contain the letters “NTSC” on the disc or
package.
• Use discs that are compatible with standards as indicated by the presence of the following logo marks on the
disc label. Playback of discs not complying with these
standards is not guaranteed. In addition, image quality or
sound quality is not guaranteed even if such discs are
able to be played back.
Discs For Recording and Playback
Disc Type
DVD-RW
DVD-R
•Ver.1.1
•Ver.1.1
(CPRM
compatible)*1
•Ver.1.1/2g
(CPRM
compatible)*1
•Ver.2.0
•Ver.2.0/4g*3
Recording
Format
VR mode
Video mode
Contents
Disc Size
Audio + Video
(Movie)
12 cm (5"),
single-sided/
double-sided,
single layer disc
8 cm (3"), singlesided, single
layer disc *2
Video mode
4.7
*1
*2
*3
“Copy Once” broadcasts and other programs that can
be recorded only once can be recorded.
DVD-R/RW 8 cm (3") single-sided, single-layer discs can
only be used for recording in the Video mode. Some
discs of this type may not be able to be recorded.
Not compatible with 4g high speed dubbing. When high
speed dubbing is used, the system will switch to 2g.
Discs for Playback (Playback Only)
Disc Type
DVD Video Region
number
1
DVD+R/DVD+RW
Video CD
Recording
Format
Video mode
Contents
Disc Size
Audio + Video
(Movie)
12 cm (5")
8 cm (3")
Video mode
Audio + Video
(finalized disc (Movie)
only)
Video CD
Audio + Video
(Movie)
12 cm (5")
ALL
Audio CD *4
Audio CD
(CD-DA)
Audio
CD-R/CD-RW
Audio CD
(CD-DA)
Audio
12 cm (5")
8 cm (3")
MP3 file
Video CD
*4
Audio + Video
(Movie)
This Recorder has been designed on the premise of
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Compact
Disc) standards. CDs containing a signal for the purpose
of protecting copyrights (copy control signal) may not be
able to be played back with this Recorder.
• DVD video players and discs have region numbers,
which dictate the regions in which a disc can be played.
The region number for this product is 1. (Discs marked
ALL will play in any player.)
• DVD Video operations and functions may be different
from the explanations in this manual and some operations
may be prohibited due to disc manufacturer’s setting.
• If “CANNOT OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.” or “THIS
OPERATION IS PROHIBITED BY THE DISC.” is displayed,
either the disc or Recorder is prohibiting the function.
Read the disc’s manual along with this manual.
• If a menu screen or operating instructions are displayed
during playback of a disc, follow the operating procedure
displayed.
Discs that Cannot Be Used with
This Recorder
■ The following discs are unable to be played back or
are not played back properly on this Recorder. If such
a disc is mistakenly played back, the speakers may
be damaged due to the large volume. Never attempt
to play back such discs.
CDG, Photo CD, CD-ROM, CD-TEXT, CD-EXTRA, SVCD,
SACD, PD, CDV, CVD, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD-Audio
■ Discs with unusual shapes cannot be played.
• Discs with unusual shapes (heart-shaped or hexagonal
discs, etc.) cannot be used. The use of such discs will
cause a fault.
■ The following DVD video discs cannot be played.
• Discs not containing “1” or “ALL” for the region number
(discs sold outside the authorized marketing area).*5
• Discs recorded in PAL format.*6
• Discs produced illegally.
• Discs recorded for commercial use.
*5
The region number for this product is 1.
*6
This Recorder is compatible with the NTSC format.
Make sure to check the format of the disc before
purchasing.
■ The following DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW discs cannot be
played.
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be
played back.
• Discs may not be played back depending on the
recorder used for recording.
■ The following Audio CD discs cannot be played.
• Discs containing a signal for the purpose of protecting
copyrights (copy control signal) may not be played
back with this Recorder.
• This Recorder has been designed on the premise of
playing back Audio CDs that comply with CD (Compact Disc) standards.
■ The following CD-R/RW discs cannot be played.
• Discs on which data has not been recorded cannot be
played back.
• Non-finalized discs cannot be played back.
• Discs recorded in a format other than a Video CD/
Audio CD and MP3 file format*7 cannot be played back.
• Discs may not be played back depending on their
recording status or the status of the disc itself.
• Discs may not be played back depending on their
compatibility with this Recorder or the recorder used
for recording.
11
About DVD
*7
About MP3 file format
MP3 files are audio data compressed in MPEG1 Audio
layer 3 file format. “MP3 files” have “.mp3” as extensions.
(Some files that have “.mp3” extensions or files that have
not been recorded in MP3 format will produce noise or
cannot be played.)
Æ Playing MP3 discs
• Some MP3 files are not played in the order they were
recorded.
• The maximum number of layers which can be
recognized, including files and folders, is 8.
• The multi-session discs cannot be played.
• It is recommended to record data at a lower speed as
data recorded at fast speed can produce noise and
may not be able to be played.
• The more folders there are, the longer the reading
time.
• Depending on the folder tree, reading MP3 files can
take time.
• Folder or track (file) names are limited to 8 characters.
Folder or track (file) names that go over 8 characters
will be abbreviated. (Certain letters or symbols in
folder names or title name may not be displayed.)
• The playing time may not be correctly displayed
during MP3 file playback.
Æ The following files cannot be played on this
Recorder.
• Discs that have more than 257 folders or 1,000 files.
• When both Audio CD format and MP3 files format are
recorded on a disc. (The disc is recognized to be an
Audio CD and only tracks in the Audio CD format are
played back.)
Types of Discs for Recording
• DVD-RW and DVD-R discs can be recorded with this
Recorder. The recording format that can be selected may
vary according to the disc version and type of disc.
• Make sure to use a disc that has the words “For Video” or
“For Recording” on the disc or disc jacket for recording
and playback with this Recorder.
Disc Type
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1
(CPRM)
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2g
(CPRM)
DVD-R Ver. 2.0
DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4g
Recording Format
VR mode
Video mode
×
×
—
×
DVD-RW Discs
• DVD-RW discs are available in Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1
(CPRM compatible) or Ver. 1.1/2g (CPRM
compatible).
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it
can be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also
allows the recording time to be increased.
• When a disc has been recorded in the Video mode,
additional recording is possible until the disc is full.
The recording time does not increase*8 even if titles
are erased, but if the disc is initialized (see pages 15
and 106) full recording time is possible.
*8
Recording time can only be increased when the last
title is erased (titles cannot be erased after a disc
has been finalized).
DVD-R Discs
• DVD-R discs can only be recorded in the Video
mode.
• Although additional recordings can be made until the
disc is full, disc space does not increase even if titles
are erased (because erasure here refers only to
making the titles not visible).
• Although these discs can be played back with other
DVD players once they have been finalized, the discs
can no longer be recorded or erased after they have
been finalized.
• Discs can be additionally recorded and edited with
this Recorder only until they are finalized.
12
About DVD
Recording Formats
• There are two recording formats available with this
Recorder: the VR mode and the Video mode.
• The recording format that can be selected may differ
depending on the disc. Refer to the section on Types of
Discs for Recording (page 12).
• Recording in the VR mode and Video mode cannot be
mixed on one disc.
Recording Time
• The recording mode that can be set varies according to
the recording format. Refer to the table below for the
applicable recording mode.
Recording
Recordable Time
Mode
FINE
About 60 minutes
VR (Video Recording) Mode
SP
About 120 minutes
The VR mode is the basic DVD-RW recording format,
and lets you enjoy the various editing functions
available with this Recorder.
• When a disc has been recorded in the VR mode, it can
be recorded and erased repeatedly. Erasure also allows
the recording time to be increased.
• Recorded discs can only be played back with DVD-RW
compatible DVD players*9.
• “Copy Once” programs can also be recorded*10.
LP
About 240 minutes
EP
About 360 minutes
*9
*10
• Although there are some cases in which the disc must
be finalized, the disc can be recorded and erased
after it has been finalized.
• DVD-RW compatible DVD players have the following
indication.
DVD players with this indication have the function of
being able to play back DVD-RW discs recorded in
the VR mode with a DVD recorder.
When using a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 disc (CPRM compatible).
Recorded programs cannot be played back with other
DVD players (including DVD-RW players) or DVD
recorders not compatible with CPRM.
Video Mode
This recording format is compatible with commercially
available DVD players and DVD-ROM drives.
• Discs recorded in the Video mode cannot be recorded
repeatedly or their content overwritten.
• When recording in the Video mode, discs can be played
back, additionally recorded and edited only with this
Recorder until they are finalized. Editing functions are
limited.
• Discs recorded in the Video mode can be played back
with other DVD players by finalizing them after recording.
(However, this does not guarantee that these discs can
be played back on all DVD players.)
• Recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs using the Video mode
employ a new standard approved by the DVD Forum in
2000, and compatibility with this standard is left to the
discretion of the respective DVD player manufacturer.
Consequently, there are some models of DVD players
and DVD-ROM drives that are unable to play back DVDR/RW discs.
• “Copy Once” programs cannot be recorded.
Description
When you want to record highquality images.
This is the standard recording
mode.
When you want to record for a long
period of time with slightly lower
image quality.
When you want to place priority on
recording time.
• Recordable time is based on the recording time when
using a 4.7 GB disc. Since recording capacity varies
according to the recorded material, there may be cases
where there is much more disc space remaining on the
disc when recording is completed.
• Refer to page 42 about the recordable times when you
choose “MN” (manual) Recording mode.
* Since recording to DVD is performed using VBR (variable
bit rate, refer to the section on VBR Control on page 116)
with the exception of some recording modes, recording
time varies according to the material to be recorded.
• Recordable time may be shorter than that indicated above in
the case of recording material of poor image quality such as
broadcasts from televisions with poor reception.
• This does not guarantee the length of recording time. Actual
recording time may be shorter than that indicated above
depending on image quality and other aspects.
• The total of recording time and remaining time may not always
agree with the recordable time of the recording mode.
• Block-like images may become conspicuous during scenes
containing rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital
image compression technology.
Disc Remaining Time
Æ VR mode
• Additional recordings can be made as long as there is
available space on the disc. (Additional recordings
can also be made after the disc is finalized.)
• Erasing unnecessary recordings lets you increase the
remaining time on the disc. (The disc can also be
erased after it has been finalized.)
• When a Play List (see page 88) is created, disc space
will not increase even if portions of titles or titles of
Play List are erased.
Æ Video mode
• Additional recordings can be made with this Recorder
provided there is available space on the disc until the
disc is finalized.
• In case you record on a DVD-RW disc, recordable
time will increase if you erase the last recorded title
unless you finalize the DVD-RW disc.
• In case you record on a DVD-R disc, recordable time
will not increase even if you erase titles (see page 87).
(The erase function only hides the title, it does not
actually erase it. It does not actually delete the
recorded contents.)
13
About DVD
Using the Proper Disc
Unrecordable Material
Select the disc and recording format to be used
according to the objective of the recording.
Select the disc and recording format by referring
to the table below.
Objective
• When you want to play
back a recorded disc with
a DVD player or DVD
Video compatible PC
• When not re-recording a
recorded disc (when
making a permanent
recording or when you
do not want the
recording to be erased)
• When you want to play
back a recorded disc with
a DVD player or DVD
Video compatible PC
• When you want to
repeatedly record and
erase a recorded disc
• When you want to edit
a disc recorded with
this Recorder
• When playing back with
a DVD-RW compatible
player with the
following indication
• When you want to
repeatedly record and
erase a recorded disc
• When you want to
record a “Copy Once”
satellite broadcast, etc.
Disc Used
Recordable
DVD-R disc
Recording Format
Video mode
recording
+
finalization
4.7
Recordable
DVD-RW disc
Ver. 1.1 or Ver.
1.1 (CPRM
compatible)
Video mode
recording
+
finalization
Recordable
DVD-RW disc
Ver. 1.1 or
Ver. 1.1
(CPRM
compatible)
VR mode
recording
+
(finalization)
Recordable
DVD-RW disc
Ver. 1.1
(CPRM
compatible)
VR mode
recording
Time display for Recording and
Playback (Video mode only)
• With this Recorder, the displayed record/playback time is
about 0.1% shorter than the actual recording time. In
video like TV broadcasts, video is sent at a rate of about
29.9 frames per second. For convenience, this Recorder
calculates using a value of 30 frames per second.
(If, for example, you record one hour, the time display on
the Recorder will be: 60 minutes x 0.999 = 59.94 minutes
= 59 mins. 56 secs.)
14
Æ This Recorder is equipped with a copy guard
function that prevents recording of video software
or broadcast programs that contain a signal that
restricts copying in accordance with copyrights and
so forth.
Example:
• DVD videos
• PPV (pay-per-view) broadcasts
Æ The proper image may not be obtained in the case
a copy guard signal is contained in the images
input from equipment connected to the external
input jacks (LINE IN 1, LINE IN 2, LINE IN 3 or DV
IN) of this Recorder.
Example:
• Images not output at proper brightness
• Incorrect output of picture size and other data
Connect such equipment directly to your TV
without going through this Recorder.
Æ In the case a copy guard signal is contained in a
source video that occurs part way through recording, recording is paused at that point. Recording
resumes when the copy guard signal is no longer
present, while no recordings will be made for the
part where the copy prevention signal is present.
Initialization and Finalization
Initialization (Formatting)
Initialization is required when using DVD-RW discs in the Video mode. (See page 106 for details about Initialization.)
When an unused DVD-RW disc is placed in the Recorder immediately after the disc has been purchased, the Recorder is set
to automatically begin initializing in the VR mode. The settings can also be changed so that discs are initialized in the Video
mode (page 106).
When using a DVD-RW disc in the Video mode without changing this setting, initialize the disc in the Video mode after first
completing initialization in the VR mode (page 106).
• Initialization causes the entire previously recorded contents of the disc to be erased.
• It takes about 1 minute to 1 minute and 30 seconds for initialization to be completed.
Allowing Discs to Be Played Back with Other DVD Players (Finalization)
Discs must always be finalized in order to play them back with another DVD player after having been recorded in
the Video mode. (See page 106 for details about Finalization)
Finalize discs on which all recordings have been completed so that they can be viewed with another DVD player or a DVD
Video compatible PC. Discs that are not finalized may not be able to be played back with other DVD players or DVD Video
compatible PCs. (However, this does not guarantee that finalized discs can be played back on all DVD players or DVD Video
compatible PCs.)
• Finalizing a DVD-R disc prevents all recording and editing of that disc.
• Although DVD-RW discs can be re-recorded by initializing even after they have been recorded in the Video mode and
finalized, all previously recorded contents are erased.
• Finalization is required if a disc recorded in the VR mode cannot be played back with a DVD-RW compatible player. (Discs
formatted in the VR mode can be recorded and edited even after finalization.)
• Finalization takes from several minutes to about an hour. (Processing takes longer if there is considerable available space
on the disc.)
The following operations may cause malfunction.
• Operating discs recorded or edited by this Recorder in a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive manufactured by other manufacturers.
• Using the discs in above situation again with this Recorder.
• Operating discs recorded or edited by a DVD recorder or PC’s DVD drive made by other manufacturers than the one for
this Recorder.
About the Contents of the Disc
Title, Chapter and Track
• DVDs are divided into “Titles” and “Chapters”. If the disc
Example 1: DVD
has more than one movie on it, each movie would be a
separate “Title”. “Chapters”, on the other hand, are
subdivisions of titles. (See Example 1.)
Title 2
• Video CDs and Audio CDs are divided into “Tracks”. You
Title 1
can think of a “Track” as one tune on an Audio CD. (See
Example 2.)
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Recording on a DVD-R/RW disc
• One recording is treated as one title and the chapters will
be inserted automatically every 10 minutes. You can
Example 2: Video CD or Audio CD
choose the chapter interval from the following: 10
minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or off (page 98).
• Each title, chapter and track will be numbered in order.
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Title, chapter and track may not be numbered in some
discs.
Recording on a DVD-RW disc in VR mode
• When you pause during recording or erase the scene using edit function, chapter marks will be inserted automatically. You
can also insert chapter marks at your favorite scenes (page 85).
Recording in Video mode
• You cannot insert chapter marks at your favorite scenes.
15
About the Contents of the Disc
Icons Used on DVD Video Disc Case
When you buy a DVD Video disc, the back of the disc case
usually contains various information about the contents of
the disc.
1
2
2
1. English
2. Chinese
3
2
4
16:9 LB
1. English
2. Chinese
5
2
123
456
z Audio tracks and audio formats
DVD discs can contain up to 8 separate tracks with a
different language on each. The first in the list is the
original track.
This section also details the audio format of each
soundtrack—Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.
Dolby Digital
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc.
that gives movie theater ambience to audio output when
the Recorder is connected to a Dolby Digital 5.1
channel processor or amplifier.
DTS
DTS is a digital sound system developed by Digital
Theater Systems for use in cinemas. This system uses 6
audio channels and provides accurate sound field
positioning and realistic acoustics. (By connecting a
DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen to
DTS Digital Surround sound.)
Linear PCM
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio
CDs.
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with
16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is recorded at between
48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)
x Subtitle languages
This indicates the kind of subtitles.
c Screen aspect ratio
Movies are shot in a variety of screen modes.
v Camera angle
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have
been simultaneously shot from a number of different
angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the
left side, from the right side, etc.).
b Region code
This indicates the region code (playable region
number).
16
The Icons Used in This
Operation Manual
HDD
...................... Indicates the functions that can be
performed for the hard disc.
DVD VIDEO .............. Indicates the functions that can be
performed for DVD Video discs.
DVD-RW
DVD-RW ... Indicates the functions that can be
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
performed for DVD-RW discs.
VR MODE:
• Indicates that the function will
operate when recording in VR mode
or playing back a disc recorded in
VR mode.
VIDEO MODE:
• Indicates that the function will
operate when recording in Video
mode or playing back a disc
recorded in Video mode.
DVD-R ................... Indicates the functions that can be
performed for DVD-R discs.
VIDEO CD .................. Indicates the functions that can be
performed for Video CDs.
AUDIO CD .................. Indicates the functions that can be
performed for Audio CDs.
CD-R
.................. Indicates the functions that can be
MP3
performed for CD-R discs in MP3
format.
CD-RW .................. Indicates the functions that can be
MP3
performed for CD-RW discs in MP3
format.
Important Information
Disc Precautions
Be Careful of Scratches and Dust
• DVD-R and DVD-RW discs are sensitive to dust, fingerprints and especially scratches. A scratched disc may
not be able to be recorded, or important data recorded
may not be able to be played back. Handle discs with
care and store them in a safe place.
Proper Disc Storage
Place the disc in the center of
the disc case and store the
case and disc upright.
Avoid storing discs in locations
subject to direct sunlight, next
to heating appliances or in
locations of high humidity.
Do not drop discs or subject
them to strong vibrations or
impacts.
Avoid storing discs in locations
where there are large amounts
of dust or locations where mold
tends to grow easily.
Handling Precautions
• If the surface is soiled, wipe gently with a soft, damp
(water only) cloth. When wiping discs, always move the
cloth from the center hole toward the outer edge.
Copyright
• It is the intent of Sharp that this product be used in full
compliance with the copyright laws of the United States
and that prior permission be obtained from copyright
owners whenever necessary.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property right owned by Macrovision
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright
protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Apparatus Claims of U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603,
4,577,216, 4,819,098 and 4,907,093 licensed for
limited viewing uses only.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
• Certain audio features of this product manufactured
under a license from Desper Products, Inc. Spatializer ®
N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device are trademarks
owned by Desper Products, Inc.
• The DVD logo is a registered trademark.
• i.LINK refers to the IEEE 1394-1995 industry specification
and extensions thereof. The
logo is used for products
compliant with the i.LINK standard.
•
• Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzene, thinner,
static electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
• Do not touch the surface.
• Do not stick paper or adhesive labels to the disc.
• If the playing surface of a disc is soiled or scratched, the
Recorder may decide that the disc is incompatible and
eject the disc tray, or it may fail to play the disc correctly.
Wipe any soiling off the playing surface with a soft cloth.
is a trademark.
• VCR Plus+ and PlusCode are registered trademarks of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The VCR Plus+
system is manufactured under license from Gemstar
Development Corporation.
“Licensed under one or more of U.S. Pat. 4,972,484,
5,214,678, 5,323,396, 5,530,655, 5,539,829, 5,544,247,
5,606,618, 5,610,985, 5,740,317, 5,777,992, 5,878,080
or 5,960,037.”
Cleaning the Pick Up Lens
• Never use commercially available cleaning discs. The
use of these discs can damage the lens.
• Request cleaning of the lens to the nearest Sharp
Authorized Service Center.
Warning of Dew Formation
• Dew may form on pick up lens or disc in the following
conditions:
• Immediately after a heater has been turned on.
• In a steamy or very humid room.
• When the Recorder is suddenly moved from a cold
environment to a warm one.
When dew forms:
It becomes difficult for the Recorder to read the signals
on the disc and prevents the Recorder from operating
properly.
To remove dew:
Take out the disc and leave the recorder with the power
off until the dew disappears. Using the recorder with
dew formation may cause malfunction.
Cautions Regarding Recording
Æ Always Make Sure to Test Record First
• Make a test recording with a DVD-RW disc first before
making any important recordings to confirm whether
or not the recorded material is recorded properly.
Æ Compensation for Recordings
• In the event a recording is unable to be made due to a
problem with this Recorder or a disc, or due to an
external factor such as a power failure or condensation of moisture and so forth, the manufacturer is not
responsible for compensation for unrecorded contents
or incidental damages.
17
Major Components
Main Unit (Front)
1
23
4
5
6
7
8
To open the
front door, lay
your finger on
this part and pull
toward you.
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
POWER (p. 26)
STANDBY indicator (p. 26)
TIMER indicator (p. 44)
CHANNEL "/'
PLAY/REC indicators
(for HDD) (pp. 39, 64)
PLAY/REC indicators
(for DVD) (pp. 41, 69)
7
8
9
10
11
11
12 13 14 15
Disc tray (p. 40)
OPEN/CLOSE (p. 40)
RESET (p. 110)
LINE IN 3 (p. 97)
• AUDIO Input jacks
• VIDEO Input jack
• S-VIDEO Input jack
DV IN terminal (p. 95)
16 17 18 19
12 Æ REC (pp. 39, 41)
13 REC STOP (pp. 39, 41)
14 REC PAUSE (pp. 39, 41)
15 HDD (p. 35)
16 DVD (p. 35)
17 | PLAY (pp. 64, 70)
18 ■ STOP/LIVE (pp. 64, 69)
19 STILL/PAUSE (pp. 67, 71)
Front Panel Display
1
2
3
7
4
5
6
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Chapter indicator (p. 34)
Disc Remaining Time indicator (p. 34)
Title indicator (p. 34)
Dubbing indicator (p. 60)
Recording Mode indicator (p. 39)
AV AUTO REC indicator (p. 55)
Information Display (p. 34)
Tamper Proof indicator (p. 38)
Simple Recording Timer indicator (p. 39)
Main Unit (Rear)
4
5
1
2
3
6
6
7
4
5
1
2
18
3
7
8 9
PASS THROUGH jack (p. 22)
IN FROM ANTENNA jack (antenna or cable
input) (p. 22)
COMPONENT Video Output jacks (p. 23)
8
9
LINE IN 1 (AUTO REC) (p. 55)
• AUDIO Input jacks
• VIDEO Input jack
• S-VIDEO Input jack
LINE IN 2
• AUDIO Input jacks
• VIDEO Input jack
• S-VIDEO Input jack
LINE OUT 1 (p. 22)
• AUDIO Output jacks
• VIDEO Output jack
• S-VIDEO Output jack
LINE OUT 2 (p. 93)
• AUDIO Output jacks
• VIDEO Output jack
• S-VIDEO Output jack
DIGITAL AUDIO Output COAXIAL jack
(p. 93)
DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL terminal
(p. 93)
Major Components
Remote Control Unit
1
2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
1 POWER (p. 26)
2
OPEN/CLOSE (p. 40)
3 Number buttons (pp. 21, 45)
4 CH DISPLAY (p. 33)
5 TIME SHIFT (p. 37)
6* START MENU (p. 29)
7* HDD (p. 35)
8* REC LIST/DVD TITLE (pp. 65, 73)
9* Cursor buttons (' /" /\ /|) (pp. 27, 29)
10* EXIT (p. 29)
11 COLOR BUTTON (pp. 43, 65)
Blue (A), Red (B), Green (C), Yellow (D)
12* REV (pp. 37, 67, 71)
13* STILL/PAUSE (pp. 37, 67, 71)
14* ■ STOP/LIVE (pp. 37, 64, 70)
15
F.ADV
,
SKIP
(pp. 67, 70, 71)
16 Æ REC (pp. 39, 41)
17 REC STOP (pp. 39, 41)
18 TV CONTROL buttons (p. 21)
19 CH " /'
20 DIRECT (p. 66)
21 VCR PLUS+ (p. 45)
22 ERASE (p. 45)
23 DUBBING (p. 59)
24 P IN P (p. 77)
25 INPUT/ Repeat (pp. 68, 71, 96)
26* DVD (p. 35)
27* ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST / DVD MENU
(pp. 65, 73, 80)
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
28* SET/ENTER (pp. 27, 29)
29* n RETURN (p. 29)
30* | PLAY (pp. 37, 64, 70)
31* FWD (pp. 37, 67, 71)
32* SLOW (pp. 67, 71)
33 REPLAY (pp. 67, 71)
34 SKIP SEARCH (pp. 67, 71)
35 REC MODE/ ZOOM (pp. 39, 41, 68, 72)
36 REC PAUSE (pp. 39, 41)
37 ANGLE (p. 72)
38 FUNCTION (p. 75)
39 FAVORITE PROG. LIST/AV AUTO REC
40
NOTE
• Buttons marked with “*” are made of
luminous rubber for easy visibility even in
the dark. (The degree of brightness will
decrease as time passes.)
41
42
43
44
45
(pp. 50, 55, 66)
CHAPTER MARK / CONNECTION GUIDE/
RESET (pp. 27, 39, 41, 64, 69)
AUDIO (pp. 33, 68, 72)
SUBTITLE (p. 72)
DISPLAY/BACKLIGHT (pp. 34, 44)
ON SCREEN (p. 33)
TAMPER PROOF (p. 38)
19
Major Components
Loading the Batteries
1
•
•
•
•
•
While pressing Y down,
slide the battery cover in
the direction of the
arrow.
2
Load the batteries.
Load the two “AAA” size batteries (R-03,
UM/SUM-4) supplied with the remote
control unit. Make sure that the battery
poles
and
are positioned as
indicated.
Slide the battery cover
in the direction of the
arrow until it clicks.
NOTE
Do not subject the remote control unit to shock, water or excessive humidity.
The remote control unit may not function if the Recorder’s remote sensor is in direct sunlight or any other strong light.
Incorrect use of batteries may cause them to leak or burst. Read the battery warnings and use the batteries properly.
Do not mix old and new batteries, or mix different brands.
Remove the batteries if you will not use the remote control unit for an extended period of time.
Operating range of remote control
Remote sensor
About 30° About 30°
Front 22.96ft.
Remote control
unit
20
3
Major Components
Operating a TV Using the
Remote Control
(Universal Remote Control)
The Universal Remote Control may operate the
basic functions of 21 different types of TVs.
To enter the Manufacturer’s Code for your TV,
follow the instructions below.
There is no guarantee that the universal
remote control will function with your TV.
Setting the
Manufacturer’s Code
1
2
3
Press POWER and CH ' of TV
CONTROL simultaneously.
• Two types of remote control codes operate
this Recorder: RC-1 and RC-2. If you
operate this Recorder by remote control
along with another SHARP DVD recorder or
DVD player placed next to it simultaneously, switching the remote control code
(both the Recorder and remote control) to
one of the signals (RC-1 or RC-2) will let
you operate only with this Recorder.
• Make sure to set the Recorder and remote
control to the same remote code. You can
not operate the Recorder if they are not set
to the same code.
Enter the 2-digit Manufacturer’s
Code with the Number buttons
(Ex. 02-“0”, “2”) within 10
seconds after releasing POWER
and CH ' of TV CONTROL.
Setting the Remote Control Code of the Remote
1
Point the remote control unit
towards the TV and then press
POWER of TV CONTROL.
Press and hold POWER and 2
together for more than 5 seconds.
2
Press POWER of this Recorder to
see if you can turn it on/off.
• If the TV turns on/off, setup was
successful. If not, repeat the procedure using another code.
See the list below for the Manufacturer’s Code
and the buttons which work with each brand.
Buttons on the Remote
CHANNEL Front display
"
panel
' /"
Setting the Remote
Control Code
Brand
EMERSON
FISHER
FUNAI
GE
GOLDSTAR
HITACHI
JVC
MAGNAVOX
MITSUBISHI
PANASONIC
PIONEER
RCA
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SONY
TECHNOL ACE
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
Code
19
17
06
07, 09
18
15
16
09
11
14
13, 21
03
07, 09
20
17
01
02
10
04
12
05
08
POWER
"
CH '/"
VOL /
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
INPUT
×
×
×
—
—
×
×
—
×
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
NOTE
• If the batteries in the remote control unit are
changed, the code settings must be reentered.
• Some brands have more than one code
listed above, due to changes in the codes.
In such cases, try another code to find the
code that operates your TV.
Example: Setting the code to “RC-2”.
• If you cannot, go to step 3.
NOTE
• The remote control code of the remote
becomes “RC-1” when you change the
batteries.
Setting the Remote Control Code of the Recorder
3
Press POWER to turn off the
Recorder.
4
Press and hold CHANNEL" and
' on the Recorder together for
more than 5 seconds.
• Each time this operation is performed,
the code of the Recorder toggles
between “RC-1” and “RC-2”. The front
panel display changes as the code
changes.
• Press POWER on the remote control
to see if you can turn on/off the
Recorder.
If remote control does not
work
Press POWER on the remote control and
check the front panel display (RC-1 or RC-2).
Set the remote control code according to the
display and press POWER to see if you can
turn on/off the Recorder.
21
Basic Connection
1
Easy Connection
The following connection is the basic connection to watch or record TV programs.
To use a cable box or satellite receiver, see “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections” on pages 24 and 25.
Important!
•Be sure to turn off and unplug from the AC outlet this Recorder and all
equipment before connecting the cables.
•This Recorder is equipped with copy protection technology. The playback
picture from this Recorder will not appear correctly on your TV when you
connect this Recorder to your TV via a VCR (or your VCR via this Recorder)
using video/audio cables.
2
To video/audio
input jacks
4
Video/audio
cable
(commercially
available)
Video/audio
cable
(supplied)
4
5
Coaxial cable
(commercially available)
To antenna
input jack
3
To antenna
output jack
VCR
To video/audio
output jacks
2
Coaxial cable
(supplied)
Connect the antenna
output jack on your VCR to
antenna input jack on your
TV using a coaxial cable.
Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO
Output jacks on this Recorder to the video/audio
input jacks on your TV using
the supplied video/audio
cable.
Be sure that the colors of the
jacks and plugs match up when
connecting the cable.
NOTE
•To connect using S-video or
component cables, see “Using
Other Types of Video Output” on
page 23.
5
To antenna
input jack
Connect the PASS
THROUGH jack on the rear
of this Recorder to the
antenna input jack on your
VCR using the supplied
coaxial cable.
NOTE
•If you connect this Recorder directly
to your TV, skip the next step.
3
TV
To video/audio
input jacks
Connect the TV antenna
cable to the IN FROM
ANTENNA jack on the rear
of this Recorder.
Connect the video/audio
output jacks on your VCR
to the video/audio input
jacks on your TV using a
video/audio cable.
Important!
•When using this connection, set
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see
page 102).
To PASS
THROUGH
After the connection
Plug in the power cords of the TV and
VCR. Then go to “EZ Set Up” (see
page 26).
The Recorder
To antenna/CATV
wall outlet
To IN FROM
ANTENNA
1
Antenna cable
(commercially available)
To VIDEO/AUDIO
Output jacks
22
Basic Connection
Using Other Types of Video Output
In order to view clearer DVD images, it is recommended that you use a commercially available S-video or component video cable when connecting your TV to the
video output.
Connecting Using
an S-VIDEO Output
TV
Connect the S-VIDEO Output
jack on this Recorder to the Svideo input jack on your TV
using an S-video cable (commercially available).
To S-video
input jack
S-video cable
(commercially
available)
The Recorder
Important!
•When using this connection, set
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see
page 102).
After the connection
Plug in the power cord of the TV. Then
go to “EZ Set Up” (see page 26).
To S-VIDEO
Output jack
TV
Connecting Using
the COMPONENT
Video Output
To component
input jacks
Connect the COMPONENT OUT
jacks on this Recorder to the
component input jacks on your
TV using a component video
cable (commercially available).
Component
video cable
(commercially
available)
The Recorder
To COMPONENT
Video Output jacks
Important!
• When using this connection:
If your TV is compatible with
progressive-scan component
video, set “PROGRESSIVE OUT” to
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON” (see
page 102).
If not, set it to “PROGRESSIVE
SCAN OFF”.
After the connection
Plug in the power cord of the TV. Then
go to “EZ Set Up” (see page 26).
23
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (1)
1
The following connection is the connection to a cable box or satellite receiver
when receiving only a few scrambled channels. When many or all the channels
are scrambled, see the connection on page 25.
Using this connection, you can:
•Record unscrambled CATV signals by selecting them on this Recorder.
•Record scrambled CATV signals by selecting them on the cable box or satellite
receiver and selecting the input used on the Recorder.
•Record a channel while you watch another.
•Record using the “AV AUTO REC” function (see page 55) when LINE IN 1 is
used for cable box/satellite receiver connection.
You can watch TV channels.
2
To video/audio
input jacks
3
Video/audio
cable
(supplied)
Connect the IN 1 (AUTO
REC) VIDEO/AUDIO jacks
on this Recorder to the
video/audio output jacks
on your cable box or
satellite receiver using a
video/audio cable.
You can record scrambled CATV
channels when using a cable box
or satellite receiver for decoding.
Coaxial cable
(commercially available)
To antenna
input jack
1
To antenna
output jack
To video/audio
output jacks
3
1
To IN 1 (AUTO REC)
VIDEO/AUDIO jacks
The Recorder
To VIDEO/AUDIO
Output jacks
To IN FROM
ANTENNA
1
Antenna cable
(commercially available)
NOTE
•These are standard video connections. You can use S-video or
component connections if they are
available.
Important!
•Connect this Recorder directly to
your TV and not via the cable box,
satellite receiver, or a VCR.
•When using this connection, set
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see
page 102).
Coaxial cable
(supplied)
To PASS
THROUGH
To antenna/CATV
wall outlet
Cable box/
Satellite receiver
To antenna
input jack
Video/audio cable
(commercially available)
24
Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO
Output jacks on this
Recorder to the video/
audio input jacks on your
TV using the supplied
video/audio cable.
You can watch video played back
on the Recorder.
TV
2
Connect the TV antenna/
CATV cable and coaxial
cables as shown on the
left.
After the connection
Plug in the power cords of the TV and
cable box/satellite receiver. Then go to
“EZ Set Up” (see page 26).
CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections
Connecting to a Cable Box or Satellite Receiver (2)
1
The following connection is the connection to a cable box or satellite receiver
when many or all the channels received are scrambled.
Using this connection, you can:
•Record any CATV signals by selecting them on the cable box or satellite
receiver.
•Record using the “AV AUTO REC” function (see page 55) when LINE IN 1 is
used for cable box/satellite receiver connection.
Connect the TV antenna/
CATV cable and coaxial
cables as shown on the
left.
You can watch TV channels.
2
NOTE
•With this connection, you cannot record a channel while you watch another.
Connect the VIDEO/AUDIO
Output jacks on this
Recorder to the video/
audio input jacks on your
TV using the supplied
video/audio cable.
You can watch video played back
on the Recorder.
TV
3
To video/audio
input jacks
Connect the IN 1 (AUTO
REC) VIDEO/AUDIO jacks
on this Recorder to the
video/audio output jacks
on your cable box or
satellite receiver using a
video/audio cable.
You can record scrambled CATV
channels.
Video/audio
cable
(supplied)
To antenna
input jack
2
Coaxial cable
(commercially available)
1
NOTE
•These are standard video connections. You can use S-video or
component connections if they are
available.
To VIDEO/AUDIO
Output jacks
To PASS
THROUGH
The Recorder
After the connection
Plug in the power cords of the TV and
cable box/satellite receiver. Then go to
“EZ Set Up” (see page 26).
To IN FROM
ANTENNA
To IN 1 (AUTO REC)
VIDEO/AUDIO jacks
Important!
•Connect this Recorder directly to
your TV and not via the cable box,
satellite receiver, or a VCR.
•When using this connection, set
“PROGRESSIVE OUT” to
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF” (see
page 102).
Coaxial cable
(supplied)
Video/audio cable
(commercially available)
3
1
To video/audio
output jacks
To antenna
output jack
Cable box/
Satellite
receiver
To antenna/CATV
wall outlet
To antenna
input jack
1
Antenna cable
(commercially available)
25
EZ Set Up
Important! (Caution during EZ Set Up):
• Do not press POWER on the Recorder or remote control.
The EZ Set Up function automatically sets the tuner channels and clock when the
antenna cable is connected to the rear of the Recorder and the power plug is
then connected to an AC outlet.
POWER
Important!
When using a cable box:
• See “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections” on pages 24 and 25.
• Leave power on the cable box turned on and select a channel that carries EDS signals.
1
2
3
Make sure that the antenna cable is connected. For connection configuration, refer to “Basic
Connection” on page 22.
Connect the power plug of the Recorder to an AC outlet.
The tuner channels and clock will automatically be set.
• This Recorder can monitor and use time-signals (EDS signals), which are provided by some TV stations, to automatically adjust the clock. This Recorder automatically searches EDS signals, but if you are in a hurry to use timer
recording or know the channel of the EDS signal carrier in your area, follow the procedure in “Auto Clock Setting”
(page 30) or “Manual Clock Setting” (page 31).
During Auto Channel Setting
During Auto Clock Setting
EZ Set Up complete
• Channel number is increasing.
NOTE
• If power is supplied to the Recorder before the cable is connected, EZ Set Up will not be able to preset the channels into
memory. If this occurs, press RESET inside the front door of the Recorder (see page 18). The EZ Set Up function will work
again.
• If the power is turned on during EZ Set Up, Auto Channel Setting will be interrupted and the tuner channels will not be
preset.
• Auto Clock Setting may take several minutes.
• If Auto Clock Setting is not completed within 30 minutes, there may be no channels with EDS signals. In this case, set the
clock manually. (See “Manual Clock Setting” on page 31.)
• If the antenna signal is weak, the Auto Clock Setting function may not operate.
• During initial channel setting, the channels are set into the AIR channel setting. To watch CATV channels, select “CATV” on
the “CHANNEL PRESET” screen. (See “Channel Setting” on page 32.)
Turning the Power On
After finishing EZ Set Up, press POWER on the
remote control or Recorder to turn on the power
of Recorder.
• When you turn on power, the HDD button and DVD button
on the front of Recorder will blink. If either the HDD or
DVD button is blinking, system processing is in progress,
so wait until the button lights up.
• When the Recorder power is turned on for the first time after
purchase, following EZ Set Up, the OSD LANGUAGE Select
screen is displayed and the Connection Guide function will
then operate. Follow the procedure shown on pages 27
and 28. From the second time on, the OSD LANGUAGE
Select screen will not appear after EZ Set Up.
To Turn the Power Off
Press POWER on the remote control or Recorder
to turn off power.
• The HDD or DVD button on the front of Recorder will go
out, and the STANDBY indicator will light up.
26
• If you press POWER again immediately after turning off,
the Recorder may not turn on. If this happens, wait a
while and then turn on power again.
About the Power Supply
• Do not unplug the power cord immediately after you
plug it into the AC outlet (less than about 15 seconds
after plugging in). In very rare cases, this may cause
the memory to revert to its initial state, and all timer
programs will be erased. If this happens, EZ Set Up
will be performed automatically. If you pull out the
power plug while power is on, it will take a while for the
hard disc to get ready when you turn on power the
next time. During this time you can only view live
broadcasts.
• If you turn on power in a low-temperature environment,
only live broadcast viewing is possible until the hard
disc (HDD) reaches its operating temperature.
Connection Guide
Before using the Recorder, use the
Connection Guide function for easy initial
settings regarding TV connection, on-screen
language, etc.
Selecting the TV Terminal
5
Preparation
Press ' / " to select the type of
video input terminal on the
connected TV.
CONNECTION GUIDE
•Turn on the power of TV.
•Switch TV input to the AV input used to
connect to the Recorder.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT TV TERMINAL
VIDEO
1
S-VIDEO
Press and hold CONNECTION
GUIDE for more than 2 seconds.
COMPONENT (Y, PB, PR)
Selecting the On-screen
Display Language
6
2
Selecting the TV Screen
Aspect Ratio
Press ' / " to select the language you want to use.
OSD LANGUAGE
Press SET/ENTER.
•The “SELECT TV MODE” screen is
displayed.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
7
SELECT OSD LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
Press ' / " to select the screen
aspect ratio of the connected TV.
CONNECTION GUIDE
FRANÇAIS
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT TV MODE
ESPAÑOL
WIDE 16:9
NOTE
•You can change On-Screen Display
Language afterward using the Connection
Guide function.
3
8
Press SET/ENTER.
•The “ADVANCED SETTINGS”
Confirmation screen is displayed.
Press SET/ENTER.
•The “START TV SET UP” screen with
“OK” button is displayed.
CONNECTION GUIDE
NORMAL 4:3
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
START TV SET UP.
9
Press \ / | to select “YES” or
“NO”, then press SET/ENTER.
CONNECTION GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADVANCED SETTINGS
SETUP CAN BE CHANGED AFTERWARD.
OK
YES
4
Press SET/ENTER.
•The “SELECT TV TERMINAL” Select
screen is displayed.
NOTE
•Press RETURN to go back to the preceding screen during the setting procedure.
NO
• When “YES” is selected
The “ADVANCED SETTINGS” screen
is displayed. Proceed to step 10.
• When “NO” is selected
The “INITIAL SETTING COMPLETE”
screen with “OK” button is displayed.
Proceed to step 17.
Continued on Next Page |||
27
Connection Guide
14 Press ' / " to select “DIGITAL
Advanced Setting
10 Press ' / " to select “PROGRESSIVE OUT”, then press
SET/ENTER.
CONNECTION GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET
TV MODE
[
NORMAL (4:3)
]
SET
PROGRESSIVE OUT
[
OFF
]
SET
DD OUTPUT LEVEL
[
NO
]
SET
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
[
Dolby Digital
]
SET
•The “SETS PROGRESSIVE SCAN
OUTPUT” screen is displayed.
11 Press \ / | to select “PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON” or “PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF”, then press
SET/ENTER.
AUDIO OUT”, then press SET/
ENTER.
CONNECTION GUIDE
TV MODE
[
NORMAL (4:3)
]
SET
PROGRESSIVE OUT
[
OFF
]
SET
DD OUTPUT LEVEL
[
NO
]
SET
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
[
Dolby Digital
]
SET
•The “DIGITAL AUDIO OUT” screen is
displayed.
15 Press ' / " to select “PCM” or
“Dolby Digital”, then press SET/
ENTER.
CONNECTION GUIDE
PCM
SETS PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUT
YOU CAN ENJOY CLEAR IMAGES WHEN PROGRESSIVE
TV IS PLAYED BACK VIA COMPONENT TERMINAL.
Dolby Digital
PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF
PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON
•The display returns to the “IMAGE/
SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET” screen.
12 Press ' / " to select “DD
OUTPUT LEVEL”, then press
SET/ENTER.
CONNECTION GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET
TV MODE
[
NORMAL (4:3)
]
SET
PROGRESSIVE OUT
[
OFF
]
SET
DD OUTPUT LEVEL
[
NO
]
SET
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
[
Dolby Digital
]
SET
•The “DOLBY DIGITAL OUTPUT
LEVEL SETTING” screen is displayed.
13 Press \ / | to select “NO” or
“YES”, then press SET/ENTER.
CONNECTION GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
Dolby Digital OUTPUT LEVEL SETTING
ADJUST AUDIO RANGE WHEN HARD TO HEAR DIALOG OF
Dolby Digital AUDIO PLAYBACK?
NO
YES
•The display returns to the “IMAGE/
SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET” screen.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
CONNECTION GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET
CAN CONNECT TO NORMAL AUDIO
DEVICE (2CH).
SURROUND EFFECT BY CONNECTING
TO Dolby Digital COMPATIBLE
AUDIO DEVICE.
•The display returns to the “IMAGE/
SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET” screen.
16 Press ' / " to select “ADVANCED SET COMPLETE”, then
press SET/ENTER.
CONNECTION GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
IMAGE/SOUND SET LIST/ADV SET
TV MODE
[
NORMAL (4:3)
]
SET
PROGRESSIVE OUT
[
OFF
]
SET
DD OUTPUT LEVEL
[
NO
]
SET
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
[
Dolby Digital
]
SET
ADVANCED SET COMPLETE
•The “INITIAL SETTING COMPLETE”
screen with “OK” button is displayed.
•For details of Function Setting, see
p.102 and 103.
NOTE
•Press RETURN to go back to the preceding screen during the setting procedure.
Completing the Initial
Setting
17 Press SET/ENTER to end the
initial setting procedure.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
INITIAL SETTING COMPLETE
OK
28
About START MENU
About START MENU
With this Recorder, you can call up functions
like Playback, Edit and Other Settings from
the START MENU.
For details on operation procedures, see the
page explaining each option.
1
2
Basic START MENU
Operation
1
START MENU[REC LIST]
3
START MENU[REC LIST]
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT/
ERASE
REC LIST
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DUBBING
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK
REC LIST
EDIT/
ERASE
DUBBING
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK
4
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
7
INFORMATION
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
5
6
1 REC LIST
Playing back with REC LIST… page 65
Calling up various functions… page 65
2 EDIT/ERASE
Editing with the Original Title List/
Play List… page 81
Erasing all recorded titles… page 87
Erasing selected titles… page 87
Protecting titles from erasure… page 86
3 DUBBING
High speed dubbing… page 59
Rate conversion dubbing… page 59
4 TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK
Programming with Easy Recording
Guide… page 43
Timer recording with VCR Plus+®… page 45
Timer recording by designating date and
time… page 47
Timer recording favorite programs… page 49
Checking/Changing timer settings… page 54
5 INITIALIZE/FINALIZE
DVD/HDD initialization… page 106
DVD finalization… page 106
6 OTHER SETTINGS
Recording function setting… page 98
Viewing/Play setting… page 100
Adjustment… page 102
7 INFORMATION… page 38
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
2
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
Press ' / " / \ / | to select an
option.
Example: When “OTHER SETTINGS” is
selected
START MENU[OTHER SETTINGS]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
REC LIST
EDIT/
ERASE
DUBBING
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
INFORMATION
3
Press SET/ENTER to enter the
selected option.
• The screen for the selected option will
appear.
• Operate using ' / " / \ / | and SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[REC. FUNCTION]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
AUTO CHAPTER
EXACT RECORDING
REC. AUDIO FORMAT
EXTERNAL AUDIO
DUAL MONO REC. SET
MANUAL REC. MODE
SAP SETTING
4
Press START MENU or EXIT to
quit the START MENU.
• The “START MENU” screen will close,
and the screen will return to normal.
NOTE
• If you perform no operation, the “START
MENU” screen will disappear after about 1
minute.
• This operation will not work at the
following times:
During playback, during Time Shift
Viewing, during display of the REC LIST,
and at the erase screen.
• If you make a mistake in operation and
want to start over, press RETURN to go
back to the preceding screen.
29
Clock Setting
Auto Clock Setting
(If you know a channel that carries EDS
signals)
Important!
When using a cable box:
• See “CATV or Satellite Receiver Connections” on pages 24 and 25.
• Leave power on the cable box turned on
and select a channel that carries EDS
signals.
1
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU screen.
START MENU[REC LIST]
REC LIST
8
Press SET/ENTER to select “TIME
ZONE”.
9
Press \ / | to select the desired
time zone.
• If you want the Recorder to use the
time zone from which broadcasts with
EDS signals are received, choose
“AUTO”. If broadcasts with EDS
signals are received from a different
time zone than the one in which you
live, be sure to select your time zone.
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
AUTO SETTING
ADJUST CLOCK USING EDS BROADCAST
MANUAL SETTING
SIGNAL.
SELECT THE EDS CH SETTING METHOD
EDS CH SET
AUTO
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT/
ERASE
MANUAL
SET THE TIME ZONE
TIME ZONE
DUBBING
13
ATLANTIC
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press
SET/ENTER.
3
Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
OTHER SETTINGS[ADJUSTMENT]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
4
Press ' / " to select “CLOCK
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press ' / " to select “AUTO
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
AUTO SETTING
ADJUST CLOCK USING EDS BROADCAST
MANUAL SETTING
SIGNAL.
SELECT THE EDS CH SETTING METHOD
EDS CH SET
AUTO
Press ' / " to set EDS CH SET
mode to “MANUAL”.
• If you do not know which channel
carries EDS signals, then select
“AUTO”.
7
Press \ / | to select a channel
that carries EDS signals.
• The number of channels that can be
selected depends on the mode
setting on the “CHANNEL PRESET”
screen. See NOTE.
When using a cable box:
• Input the output channel (02, 03, or
04) of the cable box.
30
Recorder.
• The Auto Clock Setting function will
automatically set the clock.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK SETTING
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
CHANNEL PRESET
OPTION SETTING
6
10 Press SET/ENTER, then EXIT.
11 Press POWER to turn off the
NOTE
• If the EDS CH SET mode is set to
“MANUAL” in step 6 and a channel that
does not carry EDS signals is selected in
step 7, the Auto Clock Setting function will
not operate.
• In step 7, the number of selectable
channels depends on the mode setting on
the “CHANNEL PRESET” screen. See the
table below.
AIR/CATV
AIR
CATV
Selectable channels
02
01
03
02
04
03
68
124
69
125
02
01
• As you press \ / | in step 9, the TIME
ZONE choices change as follows.
AUTO ATLANTIC
HAWAII ALASKA
EASTERN CENTRAL
PACIFIC MOUNTAIN
• If you press RETURN, START MENU or
EXIT before pressing SET/ENTER in step
10, the data will not be stored.
Clock Setting
Manual Clock Setting
1
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press
SET/ENTER.
3
Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
4
Press ' / " to select “CLOCK
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press ' / " to select “MANUAL
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]
AUTO SETTING
SET CLOCK MANUALLY
MANUAL SETTING
TIME
Automatic Daylight
Saving-Time (DST)
Adjustment
This Recorder is equipped with an internal
Automatic Daylight Saving-Time Adjustment
function. In spring (first Sunday in April) and
autumn (last Sunday in October), the time is
adjusted as shown below. This function has
been preset to “ON” at the factory. Set the
DST mode in the “CLOCK SETTING” screen.
Spring
Programmed timer recording set within this
time frame (2:00 AM to 3:00 AM) will not be
carried out.
First Sunday in April (DST is ON)
1:00 AM
2:00 AM
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DATE
10 : 28 AM 12 / 25 [ SAT ]
YEAR
DST
2004
ON
The clock is automatically
advanced 1 hour.
3:00 AM
4:00 AM
SET
6
7
Press \ / | to select “TIME” and
press ' / " to set time.
Select and set “DATE”, “YEAR”
and “DST” in the same manner as
in step 6.
Autumn
Because there will be two time frames from
1:00 AM to 2:00 AM, a timer program set
between these time frames will be influenced
by the time change.
Last Sunday in October (DST is ON)
• See “Automatic Daylight Saving-Time
(DST) Adjustment”.
1:00 AM
The clock is automatically
set back 1 hour.
Example: Dec. 25, 2004, DST: ON
OTHER SETTINGS[CLOCK SETTING]
AUTO SETTING
SET CLOCK MANUALLY
MANUAL SETTING
TIME
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
1:00 AM
DATE
10 : 28 AM 12 / 25 [ SAT ]
YEAR
DST
2004
ON
SET
8
2:00 AM
If the data is correct, press | to
select “SET”, then press SET/
ENTER to complete clock setting.
Press EXIT to return to normal
screen.
• The screen returns to normal.
NOTE
• If you press RETURN, START MENU or
EXIT before pressing SET/ENTER in step
8, the data will not be stored.
2:00 AM
NOTE
• If the timer recording program is affected
by the DST time change, check your TV
listing and find out when it reflects the time
change. Some TV listings will indicate the
time change in the same manner as is
programmed in this Recorder while others
do not show the time change until the next
morning. In that case, when programming
a timer recording, use the “CLOCK
SETTING” screen to set the DST mode to
OFF so the time change will not be carried
out.
31
Channel Setting
Channel Setting
Adding/Erasing Channel
Memory
This Recorder can receive a maximum of 181
channels as shown below by presetting the
channels into memory.
(VHF: 2 to 13, UHF: 14 to 69, CATV: 1 to 125)
Use this function to manually add or erase
channels to/from the memory.
1
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU screen.
1
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press
SET/ENTER.
2
Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU screen.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press
SET/ENTER.
4
Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
3
OTHER SETTINGS[ADJUSTMENT]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK SETTING
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
CHANNEL PRESET
OPTION SETTING
Select the channel to be added
with the Number buttons, or the
channel to be erased with the CH
' / " or Number buttons.
4
Press ' / " to select “CHANNEL
PRESET”, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
5
Press \ / | to select “AIR” or
“CATV”, then press SET/ENTER.
Press ' / " to select “CHANNEL
PRESET”, then press SET/
ENTER.
6
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“MANUAL”, then press SET/
ENTER.
Example: AIR
• To watch CATV after EZ Set Up,
select “CATV”, then press SET/
ENTER.
6
OTHER SETTINGS[CHANNEL PRESET]
Press \ / | to select “AUTO”, then
press SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[CHANNEL PRESET]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT RECEPTION TYPE
AIR
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
CATV
SELECT CHANNEL PRESET METHOD
AUTO
MANUAL
SELECT RECEPTION TYPE
AIR
CATV
7
SELECT CHANNEL PRESET METHOD
AUTO
7
MANUAL
Auto Channel Preset will start.
Press \ / | to select “ADD” if you
want to add the channel memory,
or “ERASE” if you want to erase
the channel memory.
[ADD]
• The channel display will count up,
and, when finished, the screen
returns to normal.
OTHER SETTINGS[MANUAL CHANNEL SETUP]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
3 ADD
NOTE
• If the power is interrupted for more than
1 hour, AIR/CATV selection must be set
again.
• Auto Channel Preset will be interrupted if
START MENU is pressed before the screen
returns to normal.
\/|
[ERASE]
OTHER SETTINGS [MANUAL CHANNEL SETUP]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
3 ERASE
8
32
Press EXIT to return to normal
screen.
Display Information
Content of TV Screen
Display
When the power is turned on or the channel is
switched.
3
STEREO L R
SAP
1 2 34
SAP ON
5
Display automatically
disappears in 3 seconds.
Checking Remaining Time
of HDD and Number of
Titles
When HDD button on the front of the
Recorder is lit (HDD mode)
1
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or HDD.
• The HDD information screen is
displayed.
2
3
1 Channel currently selected
2 Audio type
Stereo: STEREO
3 Audio selected by AUDIO button
4 SAP signal reception
5 SAP mode display
Monitor Output when
Receiving a Stereo or SAP
Broadcast
When receiving a stereo or SAP broadcast,
press AUDIO to change the audio output
mode to select Monitor Output. See the table
of SAP on page 99 for details.
NOTE
• When the signal is weak (hard to hear) in a
stereo broadcast, press AUDIO to turn off
“L R” display on the TV screen and change
the audio output mode to MONO.
Checking the Channel
1
Press CH DISPLAY while viewing a live program (HDD/DVD
stopping) or recording (HDD/DVD
recording).
4
5
6
HD D
OR I G I N AL
F I NE REMAIN 19 h10m
1 / 3 3
4 / 6
0 0 : 0 0 : 2 8
TI TL E RE PE AT
1
7
1 Original title playback/Play List playback indicator
2 Mode display
• Playback:
• Recording:
• Stop:
3 Recording mode and remaining
(recordable) time
4 Current title number/Total number of
titles
5 Current chapter number/Total number of
chapters
6 Counter
7 Repeat Playback indicator
REC
2
3
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or HDD again.
• The screen changes to the counter
display.
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or HDD once again.
• Display is turned off.
HDD
ORIGINAL
0 0 : 0 0 : 5 1
• Channel information is displayed.
3
STEREO L R
SAP
SAP ON
• Each time you press CH DISPLAY,
the channel information display is
turned on/off.
• The channel information display will
automatically turn off in 1 minute.
NOTE
• The HDD information screen (step 1) will
automatically disappear in 1 minute.
• The counter display (step 2) will not
disappear automatically. Press ON
SCREEN (under the cover) or HDD to turn
it off.
33
Display Information
Checking Remaining Time
of DVD and Number of
Titles
Switching Front Panel
Display
When DVD button on the front of the
Recorder is lit (DVD mode)
1
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or DVD.
• The DVD information screen is
displayed.
1 Disc type, recording format, original title
playback/Play List playback indicators
1
DVD-RW
VR OR I G I N AL
F I NE REMAIN 0h49m
1 / 7
1 / 1
0 0 : 0 0 : 1 2
TI TL E RE PE AT
Front panel display
1
Turn the power on.
• Channel display (when watching TV)
2
3
• Counter display (during playback/
recording)
4
5
6
7
2 Mode display
• Playback:
• Recording:
• Stop:
3 Recording mode and remaining
(recordable) time
• “FINALIZED” indicator when a
finalized disc is played back.
4 Current title number/Total number of
titles
• Total number of titles (Stop mode)
• Title number currently played back
(Playback mode)
• Title number currently recorded
(Recording mode)
5 Current chapter number/Total number of
chapters
• Total number of chapters (Stop mode)
• Chapter number currently played
back (Playback mode)
• Chapter number currently recorded
(Recording mode)
6 Counter
7 Repeat Playback indicator
Hour
REC
2
2
Minute Second
Press DISPLAY (under the
cover).
• Remaining time display (when
watching TV)
Hour
Minute
• Current title number and chapter
number (during playback)
Current title Current chapter
• Channel currently recorded (during
recording)
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or DVD again.
• The screen changes to the counter
display.
DVD-RW
VR OR I G I N AL
0 0 : 0 0 : 2 6
3
Press ON SCREEN (under the
cover) or DVD again.
• Display is turned off.
NOTE
• The DVD information screen (step 1) will
automatically disappear in 1 minute.
• The counter display (step 2) will not
disappear automatically. Press ON
SCREEN (under the cover) or DVD to turn
it off.
34
3
Press DISPLAY (under the
cover) again.
• The screen returns to the display in
step 1.
Preparation to Operate This Recorder
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO CD
AUDIO CD
CD-R
CD-RW
MP3
MP3
Buttons used for this operation.
Buttons with the same name on the Recorder and
remote control will perform the same operation.
Buttons on Remote Control
Buttons on Recorder
1
Turn on the power of TV.
4
Operating HDD
Press
.
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up, and HDD
operation is enabled.
2
3
Operating DVD
Switch TV input to the AV
input used to connect to the
Recorder.
Press
.
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up, and DVD
operation is enabled.
Recording and Playback
Press
to turn the
Recorder on.
• Refer to pages 38 to 77 for details
about recording and playback.
• TV broadcast will be displayed.
NOTE
• After turning on power, both the HDD and DVD buttons
on the front of the Recorder will blink for a moment while
the Recorder is getting ready. Perform this operation
after the HDD button lights up.
35
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback
With this Recorder, you can enjoy Time Shift Viewing and Chasing Playback—distinctive features of a HDD.
1 Time Shift Viewing
2 Chasing Playback
While you are watching a program, the phone rings.... At
times like this, you can pause the program by pressing a
button and watch the rest later.
You return home earlier than expected while timer recording
is in progress.... At times like this, you can watch the
program from the beginning without having to wait for the
recording to finish.
NOTE
• Some programs may not allow you to time shift view due
to copyright of the programs.
• Programs recorded for Time Shift Viewing will be erased
automatically if Time Shift Viewing is canceled.
Chasing Playback (Pause➔Play)
Press | PLAY during recording or timer recording to watch
the recorded program from the beginning.
Current
scene (live)
Recording
Time Shift Viewing (Pause)
Recording continues
You can pause during sudden phone call or when you want
to take a note. In such cases press TIME SHIFT to pause.
Press | PLAY to watch the rest of the program.
Current
scene (live)
Pause
scene
Time shift recording
Playback from beginning
Press | PLAY.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
program. (Recording continues)
Press
TIME SHIFT.
Press | PLAY.
Press ■ STOP/LIVE to return to the current (live) broadcast.
(Time shift recording stops at this point. Recorded programs
will be erased automatically.)
NOTE
• When remaining capacity of HDD during Time Shift
Viewing is gone, Time Shift Viewing will be canceled. The
current (live) broadcast will be displayed and the
recorded programs will be erased. You cannot view the
recorded part of the program.
• A message will be displayed 5 minutes before timer
recording (or timer dubbing) starts. If you are time shift
viewing, it will stop 3 minutes later.
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
If you press G REV or J FWD during Time Shift
Viewing or Chasing Playback, Fast Reverse/Forward
Playback starts.
If you press G REV (or J FWD) again, the speed of
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback changes as shown below.
(You cannot listen to audio during Fast Reverse/Forward
Playback.)
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
NOTE
• If you perform Fast Forward Playback during Time Shift
Viewing or Chasing Playback, the Recorder will automatically switch to the playback screen when Fast Forward
Playback reaches about 30 seconds before the live
broadcast. The timing that goes automatically back to
playback mode will slightly differ depending on the speed
of Fast Forward and Recording Mode.
• When the unit automatically goes back to normal
Playback during
, you can still view the program in Fast
Forward Playback up to the point of the live broadcast by
performing
or
.
36
Time Shift Viewing/Chasing Playback
Time Shift Viewing
HDD
1
Chasing Playback
HDD
Press TIME SHIFT while
viewing a program.
1
• Playback starts from the beginning of
the program being recorded.
(Chasing Playback)
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause
playback (Still Playback).
To cancel Still Playback, press
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.
• Pause screen will be displayed in a
few seconds.
Pause icon
(This will become a square icon during
Time Shift Viewing.)
2
• Press ■ STOP/LIVE to return to
current (live) broadcast.
2
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
Example: When J FWD is pressed
once
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon
• Press FSTILL/PAUSE to pause
playback (Still Playback).
To cancel Still Playback, press
FSTILL/PAUSE or |PLAY.
3
Press G REV or J FWD
during Time Shift Viewing.
• Each time you press the buttons, the
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
speed changes as shown below.
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
Press G REV or J FWD
during Chasing Playback.
• Each time you press the buttons, the
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
speed changes as shown below.
Press | PLAY.
• Playback starts from the position you
paused.
Play icon
Press | PLAY during recording.
• Press | PLAY to return to the normal
playback speed.
3
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the live broadcast which is being
recorded.
Example: When J FWD is pressed
once
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon
• Press |PLAY to return to the normal
playback speed.
4
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the current (live) broadcast.
• Time Shift Viewing will be canceled,
and the automatically recorded
content will be erased.
NOTE
• Time shift viewing will stop in the following
cases.
• TIME SHIFT or ■ STOP/LIVE is
pressed.
• HDD remaining capacity is gone.
• The broadcast whose recording is
prohibited is received.
37
Recording to HDD
This section explains recording on the
hard disc (HDD). (For information on
recording to DVD, see page 40.)
Confirming Remaining Time
for Recording
To confirm on TV screen
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover).
To confirm on front display panel
• Press DISPLAY (under the cover).
Confirming Remaining Time
This display means
that you can record
20 hours more in
FINE mode.
HD D
OR IG IN AL
F I NE REMAIN 20h0m
1 0
1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
• During live program viewing or HDD
playback, remaining time of recording in
the selected recording mode will be
displayed.
• During HDD recording, remaining time of
recording in the currently selected
recording mode will be displayed.
Guide to Recordable Length
of Time
Recording Mode
Recording mode
Recording time
FINE SP
LP
EP
20 hr 33 hr 67 hr 100 hr
• Remaining time for recording differs
according to the recording mode.
• Recordable time might be less than above
figures depending on the program to be
recorded.
• MN (manual) recording mode setting
allows you to select the picture quality from
among 32 levels on the “MANUAL REC.
MODE” screen (page 42).
Monitoring a Program Being
Recorded while Playing
Back a Disc (page 77)
• Picture in picture
This lets you monitor a program being
recorded, while playing back a disc, using
the Simultaneous Recording/Playback
function. (This will not work during
progressive scanning playback.)
Dubbing (page 57)
• Titles recorded on HDD can be saved by
dubbing them to DVD-R/RW. (You can also
dub from DVD-R/RW to HDD.)
• You can batch dub up to 5 programs.
• You can timer program dubbing so that the
recording takes place at a time when you
don’t use the Recorder.
38
Recording Programs to HDD
for High Speed Dubbing
from HDD to DVD-R/RW in
Video Mode (page 52)
• High Speed Dubbing Priority
Normally, recording onto HDD is done
using own format, but recording can also
be done using a format for high speed
dubbing onto DVDs formatted in Video
mode.
To perform high speed dubbing onto a
DVD in Video mode, set “HI SP DUB
PRIORITY” to “YES” and then record. (See
page 52.)
Favorite Program Timer
Recording (page 49)
• You can set “Overwrite Program Timer” to
periodically and automatically record a
news report, etc., or “Serial Program Timer”
to automatically record an entire series
(e.g. drama series) you wish to save.
Chasing Playback (page 37)
• This lets you playback and watch a
program from the beginning while it is
being recorded on HDD.
Simultaneous Recording/
Playback (page 77)
• This lets you playback and watch a
program recorded on HDD, or a DVD or
CD, while recording another program on
HDD.
Cutting out Commercials
(pages 81, 92)
• After recording is finished, you can cut out
commercials and other unnecessary
scenes by calling up the Erase Scene
function.
(Commercials cannot be cut out automatically during recording.)
Tamper Proof
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent
operations by mistake during recording or
timer recording.
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (ON
SCREEN and DISPLAY together) for
more than 2 seconds.
2 Each time you perform this operation,
the function is activated or deactivated.
• If you try to operate the Recorder while
Tamper Proof is set, “
” blinks in the front
display panel and tells you that Tamper
Proof is set.
Information
• When there is a report message (e.g. when
a timer recording was not successfully
performed), the Recorder displays an onscreen message telling that there is a
report message.
Check the report message by selecting
“INFORMATION” on the START MENU.
Recording to HDD
Direct Recording to HDD
HDD
6
Press REC PAUSE to resume
recording.
7
Press REC STOP to stop recording.
Explained below is the standard procedure
for recording the program being viewed onto
HDD.
• A maximum of 12 hours can be recorded
onto HDD in one direct recording session.
• A maximum of 199 programs can be
recorded (saved) onto HDD.
NOTE
• The content being recorded will not be
recorded if power failure occurs or if power
cord is accidentally unplugged.
* Also direct recording to a DVD-R/RW is
possible (page 40).
Preparation for Direct Recording
• When you record SAP broadcast, set “SAP
SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).
1
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
2
3
Press the Number buttons or
CH' / " to select the channel to
be recorded.
Press REC MODE to select the
recording mode.
• The recording mode changes as
shown below each time the button is
pressed.
FINE
SP
LP
EP
MNgg
• “DATA IS BEING RECORDED TO
DISC” displays on TV screen and
recording stops.
NOTE
• You cannot record programs whose
recording is prohibited.
• Timer recording cannot be performed
during direct recording. To perform timer
recording, stop direct recording before the
preset time for timer recording.
Inserting Chapter Marks
Manually during Recording
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK. ” is
displayed and chapter mark will be
inserted.
• You cannot insert chapter marks during
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.
Setting the Record End
Time during Direct
Recording (Simple
Recording Timer)
HDD
1
• Recording mode set by selecting
“MNgg” is the recording mode set
on the “MANUAL REC. MODE”
screen (page 42).
4
Press Æ REC during broadcast
viewing.
• The “SET STOP Timer” screen is
displayed.
2
HD D
OR IG IN AL
F I NE REMAIN 19h8m
SET STOP TIME.
1 / 1
1 / 1
0 0 : 1 9 : 3 0
5
Press ' / " to set the end time.
• The end time can be set in units of 15
minutes.
• Total recording time cannot exceed
12 hours so the end time has to be
set accordingly.
• Press EXIT to stop setting midway
through.
• Recording begins and REC icon
displays in TV screen.
• REC indicator (for HDD) on the front of
Recorder is lit red during recording.
REC icon
REC
Press Æ REC on the remote
control during recording.
Press REC PAUSE to pause
recording.
• Record Pause does not work during
Chasing Playback.
• During pause, the REC indicator (for
HDD) on the front of the Recorder
blinks.
STOP TIME 10 : 30 PM
SELECT
3
ENTER
ENTER
Press SET/ENTER.
• The record end time is set, and the
clock mark lights up on the front
display panel.
REC PAUSE icon
39
Recording to DVD
This section explains recording on the
DVD (For information on recording to
HDD, see page 38.)
Checking Remaining Time
and Other Information
Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) during
DVD playback or recording.
• Disc capacity and the number of recorded
titles, etc. are displayed. It is recommended to confirm before recording.
DVD-RW
VR OR I G I N AL
F I NE REMAIN 0h30m
2
1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
Disc capacity
Number of titles
Number of
chapters
• “REMAIN 0hr 0min” or nothing will be
displayed when an unrecordable disc is
set.
NOTE
• Disc remaining time display is approximate
measure of disc capacity. There may be
space left in disc capacity after recording.
(Remaining time during recording and after
recording might not be the same.)
Tamper Proof
• You can set Tamper Proof to prevent
operations by mistake during recording or
timer recording.
1 Press and hold TAMPER PROOF (ON
SCREEN and DISPLAY together) for
more than 2 seconds.
2 Each time you perform this operation,
the function is activated or deactivated.
• If you try to operate the Recorder while
” blinks in the front
Tamper Proof is set, “
display panel and tells you that Tamper
Proof is set.
Loading Disc
1
Press POWER to turn the power
on.
2
Press OPEN/CLOSE on the
Recorder to open the disc tray.
OPEN/CLOSE
3
Load disc on the disc tray.
Simultaneous Recording/
Playback (page 77)
• HDD playback is possible while recording
or timer recording to DVD.
Dubbing (page 57)
• Dubbing titles recorded on DVD to HDD or
titles recorded on HDD to DVD-R/RW are
possible.
• Exact Dubbing: Automatically selects the
appropriate recording mode according to
the remaining capacity of DVD when
dubbing titles recorded on HDD to DVD.
Not Enough Disc Capacity
• Exact Recording (page 98)
Exact recording functions when the
selected recording mode is not appropriate
to fit the program to the disc when you
timer record. (Will not function during timer
dubbing.)
• Alternate Recording (page 104)
Alternate recording functions when you
forget to load a DVD for timer recording. It
automatically timer records the program to
HDD.
Cutting TV Commercials
(page 81)
• You can cut unwanted scenes like TV
commercials by using the ERASE SCENE
function after the recording. (Cannot cut TV
commercials automatically.)
• You cannot cut scenes when you record
programs by Video mode to DVD-RW or
DVD-R.
40
• Insert the disc with the label face up.
• In case of disc recorded on both
sides, face the side you want to
record down.
4
Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the
disc tray.
Direct Recording to DVD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
Explained below is the standard procedure
for recording the program being viewed onto
DVD.
• You can create a maximum of 99 original
titles.
• Record in VR mode when you want to edit
later. Edit functions will be limited when you
record in Video mode.
Preparation for Direct Recording
• When you record SAP broadcast, set “SAP
SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).
1
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
• When the power is turned on, HDD
mode is selected automatically.
Recording to DVD
2
Set a DVD-RW or DVD-R disc.
• When a new DVD-RW disc not
initialized yet is set, VR mode
initializing starts automatically. When
initializing is over, you can start
recording.
• When you want to re-initialize in Video
mode, select “DVD VIDEO MODE
INIT.” screen (page 106).
• When you want to initialize in Video
mode from the beginning, select
AUTO INITIALIZE screen (page 106).
3
Press Number buttons or CHANNEL ' / " to select the channel
to record.
4
Press REC MODE to select the
desired recording mode.
• The recording mode changes as
shown below each time the button is
pressed.
FINE
SP
LP
EP
MNgg
• Recording mode set when “MNgg”
is selected is the recording mode set
on the “MANUAL REC. MODE”
screen (page 42).
5
Press ● REC.
• Recording begins and REC icon is
displayed.
• The REC indicator (for DVD) on the
front of the Recorder is lit red during
recording.
DVD-RW
REC
VR OR IG IN AL
F I NE REMAIN 1h0m
1 / 1
1 / 1
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 1
6
Press REC PAUSE to pause
recording.
• Pause will not function during timer
recording.
• The REC indicator (for DVD) on the
front of the Recorder blinks during
Recording Pause mode.
7
Press REC PAUSE to resume
recording.
8
Press REC STOP to stop
recording.
NOTE
• Press ON SCREEN (under the cover) to
confirm remaining time of DVD or check
the counter display during recording.
• You cannot record programs which prohibit
recording.
• Recording either stops or pauses automatically in the following cases.
—Program which prohibits recording is on
air.
—Unable to continue recording for some
reason.
• Timer recording cannot be performed
during direct recording. To perform timer
recording, stop direct recording before the
preset time for timer recording.
You may not be able to record on disc
edited by other recorder.
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has
more than 999 chapter marks, it cannot be
edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.
• If a disc edited by other DVD recorder has
added or erased scenes 51 times or more
per title or the disc is protected, it cannot
be edited (or recorded) with this Recorder.
About Recording to DVD in Video Mode
• In case you are recording to DVD in Video
mode and recording stops due to power
failure etc., recorded contents a few
minutes before the stop may not be
recorded.
• For details on limitation during recording in
Video mode, see page 58 too.
Inserting Chapter Marks
Manually during Recording
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).
• “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK.” displays
and chapter mark is recorded.
• You can only record chapter marks
manually when recording to DVD-RW (VR
mode).
• You cannot record chapter marks manually
when recording to DVD-RW (Video mode)
or DVD-R, or during Simultaneous Recording/Playback.
Setting Record End Time
during Direct Recording
• You can set record end time during direct
recording to DVD. For details see “Setting
the Record End Time during Direct
Recording (Simple Recording Timer)” on
page 39.
• “DATA IS BEING RECORDED TO
DISC.” displays on TV screen and
recording stops.
• Stop recording first when you take out
the disc.
41
Setting Recording Mode (HDD/DVD)
HDD Recording Mode and
Recording Time
HDD
Recording Recording
Recording Recording
Mode Time (approx.)
Mode Time (approx.)
MN17
44 Hr
100 Hr
EP MN1
MN18
42 Hr
MN2
96 Hr
MN19
39 Hr
MN3
91 Hr
LP
MN20
36 Hr
MN4
87 Hr
33 Hr
MN5
83 Hr
SP MN21
MN22
32 Hr
MN6
79 Hr
MN23
30 Hr
MN7
75 Hr
MN24
29 Hr
MN8
71 Hr
LP MN9
MN25
28 Hr
67 Hr
MN26
26 Hr
MN10
64 Hr
MN27
25 Hr
MN11
61 Hr
MN28
24 Hr
MN12
58 Hr
MN29
23 Hr
MN13
55 Hr
MN30
22 Hr
MN14
53 Hr
MN31
21 Hr
MN15
50 Hr
FINE MN32
20 Hr
MN16
47 Hr
• HDD recording time is approximate
measure. DVD recording time is approximate measure using 4.7GB disc.
• This does not guarantee the length of
recording time. Actual recording time may be
shorter than that indicated at left depending
on image quality and other aspects.
NOTE
• Higher recording mode means higher
picture quality and lower recording mode
means longer recording time.
• Picture quality of recorded content
changes distinctively if the recording mode
changes from the recording modes right
below the bold lines in left chart and
recording modes right above the bold
lines. The positions of the bold lines differ
among HDD, DVD-RW (VR Mode) and
DVD-R/RW (Video Mode).
• With MN22-32, VBR recording has a large effect,
so the actual recording time will be longer.
Setting the Manual
Recording Mode (MN)
HDD
DVD-R/RW Recording Mode
and Recording Time
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
Recording Recording
Recording Recording
Mode Time (approx.)
Mode Time (approx.)
MN1
360 Min EP MN1
360 Min
MN2
345 Min
MN2
345 Min
MN3
330 Min
MN3
330 Min
MN4
315 Min
MN4
315 Min
MN5
300 Min
MN5
300 Min
MN6
285 Min
MN6
285 Min
MN7
270 Min
MN7
270 Min
MN8
255 Min
MN8
255 Min
MN9
240 Min LP MN9
240 Min
MN10 230 Min
MN10 230 Min
MN11 220 Min
MN11 220 Min
MN12 210 Min
MN12 210 Min
MN13 200 Min
MN13 200 Min
MN14 190 Min
MN14 190 Min
MN15 180 Min
MN15 180 Min
MN16 170 Min
MN16 170 Min
MN17 160 Min
MN17 160 Min
MN18 150 Min
MN18 150 Min
MN19 140 Min
MN19 140 Min
MN20 130 Min
MN20 130 Min
MN21 120 Min SP MN21 120 Min
MN22 110 Min
MN22 110 Min
MN23 105 Min
MN23 105 Min
MN24 100 Min
MN24 100 Min
MN25
95 Min
MN25
95 Min
MN26
90 Min
MN26
90 Min
MN27
85 Min
MN27
85 Min
MN28
80 Min
MN28
80 Min
MN29
75 Min
MN29
75 Min
MN30
70 Min
MN30
70 Min
MN31
65 Min
MN31
65 Min
MN32
60 Min FINE MN32
60 Min
42
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
You can set the manual recording mode
which is used when you select “MN XX” with
REC MODE.
1
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU screen.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then press
SET/ENTER.
3
Press \ / | to select “REC.
FUNCTION”.
4
Press ' / " to select “MANUAL
REC. MODE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[REC. FUNCTION ]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
AUTO CHAPTER
EXACT RECORDING
REC . AUDIO FORMAT
EXTERNAL AUDIO
DUAL MONO REC SETTING
MANUAL REC. MODE
SAP SETTING
5
Press \ / | to select the desired
recording mode, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Refer to table on left column.
OTHER SETTINGS[MANUAL REC. MODE]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY IN
MANUAL REC. MODE WHEN USING RECORDING MODE SWITCH.
EP
LP
SP
FINE
NOTE
When playing back a DVD-R/RW disc
(Video Mode) recorded with the recorder
using a DVD player.
• When you playback a disc recorded with
the manual mode of the recorder using a
DVD player, it may not be able to playback
depending on the model (some particular
modes cannot be played back).
Timer Recording
Easy Recording Guide
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
The operation method is the same for both
HDD and DVD.
• This lets you set the timer recording
schedule for the next 7 days simply by
filling in the pertinent blocks in the onscreen time schedule.
• You can set timer recording for up to a
maximum of 32 programs. (This includes
Favorite Program Recording, Timer
Dubbing, VCR Plus+ and Timer Recording.)
To set a timer program for a
day other than the current
day (within a week)
1 Press Green (C) (DATE/TIME Select).
2 Press \ / | to select the date.
• If you select a date and press SET/
ENTER, only date will be set, and
previous screen appears.
3 Press Yellow (D) (TIME), then press \ / |
to select the time, and press SET/
ENTER.
• Proceed to step 4.
DATE
0 AM
Preparation to Use Easy Recording Guide
1 Check that the clock is displaying the
correct time.
2 Preset the channels.
3 When you record SAP broadcast, set
“SAP SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).
4 When recording from an external
equipment such as a CATV box or
satellite receiver, turn on the power of the
external equipment.
1
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU screen.
2
Press ' / "/ \ / | to select
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU[TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK]
EDIT/
ERASE
DUBBING
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
4
5
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
3
n
ENTER
6
1 SAT
9
RETURN
TIME
Press ' / " to select the channel.
29 WED
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
30 THU 31 FRI
1 SAT
11
12
45
LINE IN 2 (EXT.2)
Press \ / | to select the start
time, then press SET/ENTER.
• You cannot select a time frame which
is already scheduled.
EASY REC. GUIDE
➡
6
• If you press Yellow (D) (TIMER LIST),
you can check and change timer
settings which have already been
made. To make a change, choose the
timer program you want to change
with ' / " and press SET/ENTER,
and then perform step 4 (page 47) to
step 15 (page 48).
ENTER
ENTER
0 PM
EASY REC GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 30 THU 1 SAT
CHANNEL
10 AM
11
12
10
20
30
33
45
40
50
60
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
30 THU 31 FRI
1 SAT
11
12
ENTER
• The start time can be selected in 15
minute units. If the desired 15 minute
time frame will start within 3 minutes,
that time frame cannot be selected.
Example: If you select 10:30 at 10:28,
the start time will switch to 10:45.
• The “EASY REC. GUIDE” screen (time
schedule) is displayed.
EASY REC. GUIDE
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED
CHANNEL
10 AM
10
45
20
30
33
40
9
LINE IN 3 (EXT.3)
INFORMATION
VCR Plus+
ENTER
• The channel can be selected as
follows.
TV channels LINE IN 1 (EXT.1)
Press ' / " to select “EASY REC.
GUIDE”, then press SET/ENTER.
TIMR PROG/CHCK[EASY REC. GUIDE]
6
EASY REC. GUIDE
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE
CHANNEL
10 AM
10
20
30
33
40
50
60
SETS TIMER PROGRAM AND CONFIRMS TIMER PROGRAM CONTENT
3
3
SELECT
RETURN
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
REC LIST
SELECT DATE
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 31 FRI
Press \ / | to select the stop
time, then press SET/ENTER.
• The stop time can be set in 15 minute
units (up to a maximum of 12 hours in
the future).
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EASY REC GUIDE
TODAY 26 SUN 27 MON 28 TUE 29 WED 30 THU 31 FRI
1 SAT
CHANNEL
10 AM
11
12
10
20
30
33
45
30
40
50
60
Continued on Next Page |||
43
Timer Recording
7
Press ' / " to select the recording disc (“HDD” or “DVD”), then
press SET/ENTER.
• You cannot select “DVD” to record
more than 6 hours.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
12/25
[SAT] 10 : 45 AM – 11 : 30 AM
AIR/CATV CH 33
HDD
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
HDD TIMER RECORDING
FINE
MODE:
• Press \ / | to select the item you
want to correct such as the start/stop
time, then press ' / " to correct.
(For details refer to page 46.)
• If you complete timer recording
setting less than 3 minutes before it
starts, timer recording start time
column will stay as selected. Reset
the timer recording start time at least
3 minutes after the present time.
8
1 Press \ / | to select “REC.
MODE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
2 Press ' / " to select the
recording mode, then press
SET/ENTER.
• If there is not enough empty space
(time), a message is displayed.
Select the recording mode again.
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is
selected:
• Select the recording mode with \ / |, then
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode
can be selected from 32 levels.)
9
Confirm the setting of timer
program, press \ to select
“COMPLETE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
COMPLETE
SELECT
DAILY
REC. MODE
ENTER
WEEKLY
ENTER
ADVANCED
n
RETURN
ONCE
• “TIMER PROGRAM LIST” screen is
displayed.
• The TIMER indicator on the front of
the Recorder lights up and timer
programming is completed.
• Select “ADVANCED” to input (or
change) the title name of program,
etc. (For details refer to page 51.)
44
10 Confirm the programs on the list
and then press SET/ENTER.
• The “TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”
screen is displayed. If you continue
timer programming using Easy
Recording Guide, repeat from step 3.
11 Press START MENU or EXIT to
complete EASY REC. GUIDE timer
setting.
• Timer recording will function even
after you turn the power off.
NOTE
• When you set DVD as recording media,
timer recording will not start during disc
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING”
(page 104) is set to “YES”, the program will
be timer recorded to HDD.
• Timer recording will not start during
dubbing.
• When the power is off while recording timer
is set, front display panel will light up once
timer recording starts. If you want to turn off
the light, set “LCD BACKLIGHT REC.”
(page 104) to “YES”.
You can also turn off the light by pressing
BACK LIGHT on the remote control (under
the cover) for more than 2 seconds.
Convenient Functions When Recording to
DVD
Exact Recording (page 98)
• If you set EXACT RECORDING to “YES”,
the Recorder will automatically adjust the
recording mode of timer recording so the
recorded programs will fit into one disc.
Alternate Recording (page 104)
• You can record timer programs to HDD
automatically when Exact Recording
cannot fit the programs into one disc.
• Alternate Recording will also function when
you forgot to insert the disc for recording.
To check, change or cancel
timer settings
• See page 54.
To stop recording while
timer recording is in
progress
• If you press REC STOP, “TIMER RECORDING IS IN PROGRESS, IF YOU
PRESS THE REC. STOP BUTTON ONCE
MORE, TIMER RECORDING CANCELS
AND RECORDING STOPS.” will appear
on the screen. Even that message goes
out of the screen, pressing REC STOP
one more time will stop the recording.
Timer Recording
Timer Recording with
VCR Plus+® System
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
4
DVD-R
The operation method is the same for both
HDD and DVD.
• The VCR Plus+® System allows you to
program your Recorder for timer recording
simply by inputting the PlusCode number.
• The PlusCode numbers are listed in most
newspapers, television guides, and local
CATV listings. Simply by inputting this
PlusCode number, you can program your
Recorder for timer recording, eliminating
the need to input program start time, stop
time, channel, date and other information
usually necessary for timer recording.
• Up to 32 timer programs can be stored.
(This includes Easy Recording Guide,
Favorite Program, Timer Dubbing, and
Timer Program.)
Preparation to Use VCR Plus+ System
1 Check that the clock is displaying the
correct time.
2 Preset the channels.
3 When you record SAP broadcast, set
“SAP SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).
4 When recording from an external
equipment such as a CATV box or
satellite receiver, turn on the power of the
external equipment.
1
• You cannot select “DVD” to record
more than 6 hours.
• When recording a program on a
channel for the first time, be sure to
enter the correct channel number in
step 4, otherwise the PlusCode
number will not be successfully
decoded.
12/25
VCR Plus+ system
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
PRESS NUM KEYS TO ENTER PlusCode No.
1
2
3
4
5
–
–
–
HDD
5
1 Press \ / | to select “REC.
MODE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
2 Press ' / " to select the
recording mode, then press
SET/ENTER.
• If there is not enough empty space
(time), a message is displayed.
Select the recording mode again.
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is
selected:
• Select the recording mode with \ / |, then
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode
can be selected from 32 levels.)
–
ERASE
• Press ERASE if you make a mistake
in the Plus Code number. Or Press \ /
| to select “ERASE”, then press SET/
ENTER. Each time you press the
button, one digit will be erased.
• Press VCR PLUS+ (button) to cancel
the entire number.
3
AIR/CATV CH 33
• Press \ / | to select the item you
want to correct such as the start/stop
time, then press ' / " to correct.
(For details refer to page 46.)
• If you complete timer recording
setting less than 3 minutes before it
starts, timer recording start time
column will stay as selected. Reset
the timer recording start time at least
3 minutes after the present time.
6
SET
[SAT] 10 : 45 AM – 11 : 30 AM
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
Press VCR PLUS+ (button) to
display the VCR Plus+ Setting
screen.
Press Number buttons to enter
the PlusCode number.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
• If you press VCR PLUS+ (button)
when the clock has not been set, the
“CLOCK SETTING” screen will
appear.
2
1 Press \ / | to select the
recording disc selection
column.
2 Press ' / " to select the
recording disc (“HDD” or
“DVD”), then press SET/
ENTER.
Press \ / | to select “SET”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• The timer recording details such as
date, start time, end time, channel
and the recording disc will be
displayed.
Confirm the setting of timer
program, press \ to select
“COMPLETE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
• “TIMER PROGRAM LIST” screen is
displayed.
• The TIMER indicator on the front of
the Recorder lights up and timer
programming is completed.
• Select “ADVANCED” to input (or
change) the title name of program,
etc. (For details refer to page 51.)
Continued on Next Page |||
45
Timer Recording
7
Confirm the programs on the list
and then press SET/ENTER.
• Timer Setting will be completed and
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK” screen
will appear. To continue timer
recording with VCR Plus+, select VCR
Plus+, press SET/ENTER and follow
the same procedure from step 2.
NOTE
Timer Recording from an External Equipment
(e.g. CATV box) using VCR Plus+ System
• Press \ / | in step 4 to select “AIR/CATV”,
then press ' / " to select “EXT.”. Next,
press \ / | to select “CH”, then press ' /
" to select the input used for external
equipment connection (L1/L2/L3), and then
press SET/ENTER.
Blue (A)
(DAILY):
DAILY
Red (B)
SUNs
(WEEKLY):
MONs
MO-SAT
FRIs
MO-FRI
SATs
To Correct Date in Step 4
• Press \ / | to select the date, then press
' / " to correct.
To Correct Time in Step 4
• Press \ / | to select hour or minute, then
press ' / " to correct.
To Set Daily and Weekly Timer Program
• Press Blue (A) or Red (B) in step 4. Each
time you press the button, setting changes
as shown below:
To Change Title Name, etc.
• If you want to change the title name, etc.,
press | to select “ADVANCED” then press
SET/ENTER. For details refer to page 51.
• A message will be displayed when two or
more timer programs overlap.
• If an error message is displayed, confirm
the PlusCode number and input the correct
number.
• When you set DVD as recording media,
timer recording will not start during disc
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING” is
set to “YES”, the program will be timer
recorded to HDD.
• Timer recording will not start during
dubbing.
• When the power is off while recording timer
is set, front display panel will light up once
timer recording starts. If you want to turn off
the light, set “LCD BACKLIGHT REC.”
(page 104) to “YES”.
You can also turn off the light, by pressing
BACK LIGHT on the remote control (under
the cover) for more than 2 seconds.
46
Convenient Functions When Recording to
DVD
Exact Recording (page 98)
• If you set EXACT RECORDING to “YES”,
the Recorder will automatically adjust the
recording mode of timer recording so the
recorded programs will fit on one disc.
Alternate Recording (page 104)
• You can record timer programs to HDD
automatically when Exact Recording
cannot fit the programs on one disc.
• Alternate Recording will also function when
you forgot to insert the disc for recording.
To check, change or cancel
timer settings
• See page 54.
To stop recording while
timer recording is in
progress
• If you press REC STOP, “TIMER RECORDING IS IN PROGRESS, IF YOU
PRESS THE REC. STOP BUTTON ONCE
MORE, TIMER RECORDING CANCELS
AND RECORDING STOPS.” will appear
on the screen. Even that message goes
out of the screen, pressing REC STOP
one more time will stop the recording.
Timer Recording
5
Timer Recording by
Specifying Date, Time
and Channel
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
Press ' / " to set the recording
start time (hour), then press |.
TIMER PROGRAM
12/26
6
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 0h02m
1
Press START MENU to display
the START MENU screen.
2
Press ' / "/\ / | to select
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then
press SET/ENTER.
HDD
TIMR PROG/CHCK[TIMER PROGRAM]
7
VCR Plus+
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC
Example: December 26
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
AIR/CATV CH
1
HDD
To Set Daily or Weekly Timer Program
• Press Blue (A) or Red (B). Each time you
press the button, setting changes as shown
below:
DAILY
AIR/CATV CH
1
HDD
HDD TIMER RECORDING
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 0h02m
FINE
Set the recording stop time (hour
and minute) in the same manner
as steps 5 and 6, then press |.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
12/26
[SUN] 9 : 05 AM – 10 : 35 AM
AIR/CATV CH
1
HDD
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
8
HDD TIMER RECORDING
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 1h30m
FINE
Press ' / " to select the desired
input source (AIR/CATV or EXT.),
then press |.
TIMER PROGRAM
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
12/26
[SUN] 9 : 05 AM – 10 : 35 AM
AIR/CATV CH
1
HDD
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
HDD TIMER RECORDING
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 1h30m
FINE
Press ' / " to select the desired
channel (input) number, then
press |.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
Press ' / " to select the desired
month/day (DATE), then press |.
[SUN] 10 : 31 AM – 10 : 33 AM
9 : 07 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
TIMER PROGRAM
TIMER PROGRAM
[SUN] 9 : 05 AM –
TIMER PROGRAM
9
EASY REC. GUIDE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.
FINE
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
Press ' / " to select “TIMER
PROGRAM”, then press SET/
ENTER.
Red (B)
SUNs
(WEEKLY):
1
Press ' / " to set the recording
start time (minute), then press
SET/ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM
Example: Recording a TV program in the
FINE mode: the TV program is on channel 123
starting at 9:05 AM and stopping at 10:35 AM
on December 26.
Blue (A)
(DAILY):
AIR/CATV CH
HDD TIMER RECORDING
12/26
12/26
9 : 33 AM
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
Preparation for Timer Recording
1 Check that the clock is displaying the
correct time.
2 Preset the channels.
3 When you record SAP broadcast, set
“SAP SETTING” to “ON” (see page 98).
4 When recording from an external
equipment such as a CATV box or
satellite receiver, turn on the power of the
external equipment.
4
[SUN] 9 : 31 AM –
DVD-R
The operation method is the same for both
HDD and DVD.
• You can timer record up to 32 programs
scheduled within a year, including Favorite
Programs and programs set by Timer
Dubbing, VCR Plus+ System, and Easy
Recording Guide.
• You can consecutively record up to 12
hours to HDD.
3
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
MO-SAT
MO-FRI
12/26
[SUN] 9 : 05 AM – 10 : 35 AM
AIR/CATV CH 123
HDD
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
HDD TIMER RECORDING
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 1h30m
FINE
10 Press ' / "
to select the recording disc (“HDD” or “DVD”), then
press SET/ENTER.
• You cannot select “DVD” to record
more than 6 hours.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
12/26
[SUN] 9 : 05 AM – 10 : 35 AM
AIR/CATV CH 123
HDD
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
MONs
FRIs
SATs
HDD TIMER RECORDING
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 1h30m
FINE
Continued on Next Page |||
47
Timer Recording
11 Press \ / | to select “REC.
MODE”, then press SET/ENTER.
COMPLETE
REC. MODE
SELECT
DAILY
ENTER
ADVANCED
n
ENTER
WEEKLY
RETURN
ONCE
• When you select “ADVANCED” see
page 51.
12 Press ' / " to select the
recording mode, then press SET/
ENTER.
• If there is not enough empty space
(time), a message is displayed.
Select the recording mode again.
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is
selected:
• Select the recording mode with \ / |, then
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode
can be selected from 32 levels.)
13 Confirm the setting of timer
program, press \ to select
“COMPLETE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
COMPLETE
REC. MODE
SELECT
DAILY
ENTER
WEEKLY
ADVANCED
n
ENTER
RETURN
ONCE
• “TIMER PROGRAM LIST” screen is
displayed.
• The TIMER indicator on the front of
the Recorder lights up and timer
programming is completed.
14 Confirm the programs on the list
and then press SET/ENTER.
15 Press EXIT to complete timer
setting.
• Timer recording will function even
after you turn the power off.
NOTE
To Correct Date in Step 4
• Press \ / | to select the date, then press
' / " to correct.
To Correct Time in Step 5, 6, 7
• Press \ / | to select hour or minute, then
press ' / " to correct.
To Set Daily and Weekly Timer Program
• Press Blue (A) or Red (B) in step 4. Each
time you press the button, setting changes
as shown below:
Blue (A)
DAILY
MO-SAT
MO-FRI
(DAILY):
48
MONs
FRIs
To check, change or cancel
timer settings
• See page 54.
• Program that has just been set is
selected.
• The screen in step 3 is displayed.
• If you want to timer record more
programs, repeat from step 3.
Red (B)
SUNs
(WEEKLY):
To Change Title Name, etc.
• If you want to change the title name, etc.,
press | to select “ADVANCED” then press
SET/ENTER. For details refer to page 51.
• A message will be displayed when two or
more timer programs overlap.
• A message will be displayed if previously
set timer programs total 32. Select “NO”
and press SET/ENTER. Then, cancel
unnecessary timer programs.
• When you set DVD as recording media,
timer recording will not start during disc
playback. If “ALTERNATE RECORDING” is
set to “YES”, the program will be timer
recorded to HDD.
• Timer recording will not start during
dubbing.
• When the power is off while recording timer
is set, front display panel will light up once
timer recording starts. If you want to turn off
the light, set “LCD BACKLIGHT REC.”
(page 104) to “YES”.
You can also turn off the light by pressing
BACK LIGHT on the remote control (under
the cover) for more than 2 seconds.
Convenient Functions When Recording to
DVD
Exact Recording (page 98)
• If you set EXACT RECORDING to “YES”,
the Recorder will automatically adjust the
recording mode of timer recording so the
recorded programs will fit on one disc.
Alternate Recording (page 104)
• You can record timer programs to HDD
automatically when Exact Recording
cannot fit the programs on one disc.
• Alternate Recording will also function when
you forgot to insert the disc for recording.
SATs
To stop recording while
timer recording is in
progress
• If you press REC STOP, “TIMER RECORDING IS IN PROGRESS, IF YOU
PRESS THE REC. STOP BUTTON ONCE
MORE, TIMER RECORDING CANCELS
AND RECORDING STOPS.” will appear
on the screen. Even that message goes
out of the screen, pressing REC STOP
one more time will stop the recording.
Timer Recording
Favorite Program Timer
Recording
6
• Select a column displayed as “NOT
REGISTERED”.
HDD
If you register weekly drama and serial
programs to the Recorder, you can automatically record to HDD. (Favorite Program Timer
Recording)
• There are two ways to register the favorite
programs.
Overwrite Program Timer
• This function allows you to additionally
record a program every time it is on the air.
It is convenient when you want to store a
serial drama, feature program, etc.
Serial Program Timer
• This function adds and records the most
recent favorite programs every time.
Convenient to record serial drama and
programs as a series.
• You can register up to 3 programs each to
Overwrite Program and Serial Program by
setting Favorite Program.
• Refer to page 66 on how to view.
• Recorded programs can be recorded
(dubbed) to DVD. Refer to page 61 on how
to dub.
1
Press START MENU to display
START MENU screen.
START MENU [REC LIST]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT/
ERASE
REC LIST
DUBBING
DISPLAYS LIST OF RECORDED TITLES FOR PLAYBACK
TIMER
PROGRAM/
3
4
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC
RESERVED OVERWRITE PROGRAM
INITIALIZE/
OTHER
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then
press SET/ENTER.
Press ' / " to select “FAVORITE
PROGRAM”, then press SET/
ENTER.
TIMER PROG/CHCK[FAVORITE PROGRAM]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW TO REGISTER, CANCEL OR CHANGE PROG.
NOT REGISTERED
PROGR. 1
NOT REGISTERED
PROGR. 2
O
7
GS
Press ' / " to select setting,
then press SET/ENTER to move
to next setting item.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC
SET THE TIMER RECORDING PERIOD, TIME AND CHANNEL.
DAILY
FRI 10 : 31 AM – 10 : 34 AM AIR/CATV CH
1
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
HDD TIMER RECORDING
MODE:
HDD REMAIN:
REC TIME: 0h02m
19h47m
HI SP DUBBING:
FINE
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE
OFF
COMPLETE
REC. MODE
ADVANCED
• Press ' / " to set as following:
Recording Date
DAILY
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
2
Press ' / " to select “PROGR.
1”, “PROGR. 2” or “PROGR. 3”,
then press SET/ENTER.
MO-SAT
MO-FRI
SUNs
SATs
Recording Start/Stop Time:
Set the hour of start/stop
7
PM time.
Set the minute of start/stop time.
00
Input Source
AIR/CATV
EXT.
Channel
Select the channel.
Colored Buttons
Press Blue (A) to set “DAILY”. Each time you
press the button, the setting toggles as
shown below:
DAILY
MO-SAT
MO-FRI
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.
EASY REC GUIDE
VCR Plus+
TIMER PROGRAM
Press Red (B) to set “WEEKLY”. Each time
you press the button, the setting toggles as
shown below:
SUNs
MONs
FRIs
SATs
FAVORITE PROGRAM
TIMER PROGRAM LIST
5
Press ' / " to select
“OVERWRITE PROGRAM TIMER”
or “SERIAL PROGRAM TIMER”,
then press SET/ENTER.
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC
SETS DATE, TIME, CHANNEL FOR TIMER PROGRAM
OVERWRITE PROGRAM TIMER
SERIAL PROGRAM TIMER
• After setting the channel, press SET/
ENTER to move to step 8.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
REPEATEDLY OVERWRITES TO HDD
REC. TO HDD EACH TIME AS DIF
PROG AND GROUP TOGETHER.
Continued on Next Page |||
49
Timer Recording
8
1 Press \ / | to select “REC.
MODE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
2 Press ' / " to select recording
mode, then press SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
DAILY 9:30 PM ~ 10:00 PM CH 1
Changing the Content of
Register
• You can change date, channel, registered
name and recording mode.
1
Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST
(under the cover).
2
Press Green (C) to select
“OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM” or
“SERIAL PROGRAM”.
SELECT THE RECORDING MODE
FINE
( QUALITY
HIGH
* * Mbps)
SP
( * * Mbps)
STANDARD
2X ( * * Mbps)
LP
EP
MANUAL SETTING (MN)
3X ( * * Mbps)
ABLE TO MANUALLY SELECT
1 OF 32 LEVELS.
3
REMAIN TIME: FINE 19h47m
• If there is not enough empty space
(time), a message is displayed.
Select the recording mode again.
4
5
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is
selected:
• Select the recording mode with \ / |, then
press SET/ENTER. (The recording mode
can be selected from 32 levels.)
Select the program for which you
wish to change its content.
Press Blue (A) (CHNG REG).
Change the content of register in
next screen.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
FAVORITE PROGRAM TIMER REC
SET THE TIMER RECORDING PERIOD, TIME AND CHANNEL.
DAILY
FRI 10 : 31 AM – 10 : 00 AM AIR/CATV CH
1
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
DAILY 9:30 PM ~ 10:00 PM CH 1
EP
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY
IN MANUAL REC. MODE BASED ON REMAINING.
LP
SP
MODE:
HDD REMAIN:
REC TIME: 1h00m
HI SP DUBBING:
COMPLETE
19h47m
OFF
FINE
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE
REC. MODE
ADVANCED
FINE
• Change of date and channel can be
done in page 49, step 7.
• Change of registered name can be
done in pages 51 and 52, steps 1-6.
• Change of recording mode can be
done in page 50, step 8.
CURRENT MODE:MN 16
REMAINING TIME:HDD 48h57m
9
HDD TIMER RECORDING
Press \ / | to select “COMPLETE”, then press SET/ENTER.
Canceling the Register
COMPLETE
SELECT
DAILY
REC. MODE
ENTER
ENTER
ADVANCED
n
RETURN
• Refer to page 51 when you select
“ADVANCED”.
10 Press SET/ENTER.
• One favorite program is registered
and the screen in step 4 will be
displayed.
50
1
Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST
(under the cover).
2
Press Green (C) to select
“OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM” or
“SERIAL PROGRAM”.
WEEKLY
3
4
Select the program you wish to
cancel.
Press Red (B) (CNCL REG).
Timer Recording
Timer Program Detail
Setting
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
• Select “ADVANCED” during timer programming to set the following:
Register and Change Program Name
(page 51)
• You can input capital letters, small
letters, numerals, symbols and space up
to 64 characters.
High Speed Dubbing Priority (page 52)
• You can high speed dub programs timer
recorded on HDD to DVD in Video mode
if you set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.
Favorite Program Registration (page 53)
• You can register favorite programs timer
recorded by Easy Recording Guide,
VCR Plus+ and Timer Program.
Changing and Registering
Program Name (Input Characters)
1
When you set a timer program,
select “ADVANCED” in screen
below, then press SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
12/26
[SUN] 10 : 31 AM – 10 : 33 AM
AIR/CATV CH
HDD
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 0h02m
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE
OFF
COMPLETE
2
FINE
HDD TIMER RECORDING
HI SP DUBBING:
REC. MODE
ADVANCED
Press ' / " to select “REG/CHNG
PROG NAME”, then press SET/
ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
12/26 SAT 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1
PROGRAM NAME:
REG/CHNG PROG NAME
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
FAVORITE PROGRAMS
SETTING COMPLETE
REGISTERS/CHANGES PROGRAM NAME
➡
• You can call up Timer Program Detail
Setting screen in next step.
“EASY REC. GUIDE”
• Select “ADVANCED” in step 9 on page
44.
“VCR Plus+”
• Select “ADVANCED” in step 6 on page
45.
“TIMER PROGRAM”
• Select “ADVANCED” in step 13 page 48.
1
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
Input Character Screen
Input field
(Displays title name. Can
change and input title name.)
Cursor
(Displays the position to input characters.)
Displays input characters.
Select when you switch
between capital letters
and small letters.
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1
PROGRAM NAME:
World Railway Trains |
K L M .
(
)
?
:
!
;
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å Æ Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Í
Î
Ï
#
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
1
'
2
3
5
7
8
9
-
+
<
=
/
6
]
$ %
" _
*
4
[
ß
>
{
|
}
˜
i
A B C D E
F G H
I
J
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
À
0
&
SELECT
BACK SPACE
\
^
ENTER
BACK
ENTER
ERASE
Ì
,
ERASE ALL
FOWARD
Press ' / " / \ / | to
select the character to
be input.
small
END
n
RETURN
SPACE
Select when you
complete inputting
character.
Continued on Next Page |||
51
Timer Recording
3
Change title name
1 Press Red (B) or Green (C) to
select the character to change.
• When you want to insert characters,
move the cursor to the position you
want to insert by pressing Red (B) or
Green (C).
Recording to Prepare for
Dubbing to DVD in Video
Mode
1
2 Press Blue (A) to erase the
character to change.
When you set a timer program,
select “ADVANCED”, then press
SET/ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
12/26
World Rail
[SUN] 10 : 31 AM – 10 : 33 AM
AIR/CATV CH
1
HDD
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
4
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
character to input, then press
SET/ENTER.
M|
K L M .
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z (
A B C D E
F G H
I
J
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å Æ Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
1
& '
2
3
5
8
9
-
+
/
6
]
7
*
4
[
{
À
0
\
^
Ì
,
)
?
:
!
;
#
Í
Î
Ï
<
=
ß
>
$ %
" _
|
}
˜
i
small
Input title letters by repeating step
4.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select “End”,
then press SET/ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1
PROGRAM NAME:
My Favorite Series 1 |
A B C D E
F G H
I
J
K L M .
(
)
?
:
!
;
Í
Î
Ï
#
$ %
" _
i
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
À
0
&
,
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å Æ Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
1
'
2
3
5
8
9
-
+
<
=
/
6
]
7
*
4
[
ß
>
{
|
}
˜
SELECT
BACK SPACE
\
^
ENTER
BACK
ENTER
ERASE
Ì
ERASE ALL
FOWARD
small
END
n
RETURN
SPACE
• The screen in step 2 on page 51 is
displayed.
NOTE
• You can change the title name using the
Edit feature (page 83) by the same
sequence of operations.
52
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE
REC. MODE
ADVANCED
Press ' / " to select “HI SP DUB
PRIORITY”, then press SET/
ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS
• Press Blue (A) (BACK SPACE) to
erase text to the left of the cursor, a
character at a time.
• Press Red (B) (BACK) to move the
cursor back one space.
• Press Green (C) (FORWARD) to move
the cursor forward one space.
• Press Yellow (D) (SPACE) to input a
space.
• The maximum number of characters
you can input is 64.
6
REC. TIME: 0h02m
OFF
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1
PROGRAM NAME:
END
REG/CHNG PROG NAME
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
FAVORITE PROGRAMS
SETTING COMPLETE
• Inputs character in input field.
• To switch between capital and small
letters, select “CAPS” or “small”, then
press SET/ENTER.
5
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
COMPLETE
2
FINE
HDD TIMER RECORDING
HI SP DUBBING:
SELECT [HI SP DUB PRIORITY] FOR
HIGH SPEED DUBBING?
HIGH SPEED DUBBING HAS CERTAIN
RESTRICTIONS.
SEE MANUAL FOR DETAILS.
YES
3
NO
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
12/26 SUN 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1
PROGRAM NAME:
REG/CHNG PROG NAME
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
FAVORITE PROGRAMS
SETTING COMPLETE
SELECT [HI SP DUB PRIORITY] FOR
HIGH SPEED DUBBING?
HIGH SPEED DUBBING HAS CERTAIN
RESTRICTIONS.
SEE MANUAL FOR DETAILS.
YES
SELECT
4
ENTER
ENTER
NO
n
RETURN
Press ' / " to select “SETTING
COMPLETE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Confirmation screen with “OK” button
is displayed. Press SET/ENTER.
• The screen in step 1 is displayed.
NOTE
• You cannot edit frame by frame the
program recorded using High Speed
Dubbing Priority.
• To edit frame by frame after recording,
display REC LIST, press Yellow (D) (FUNC
MENU), and cancel High Speed Dubbing
Priority using the Function Menu. You
cannot set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to the
program again once you cancel.
Timer Recording
Registering as Favorite
Program
1
When you set a timer program,
select “ADVANCED”, then press
SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
SET THE TIMER RECORDING DATE, TIME, CHANNEL AND MEDIA.
12/26
[SUN] 10 : 31 AM – 10 : 33 AM
AIR/CATV CH
1
HDD
– – – TIMER PROG INFO – – –
MODE:
HDD REMAIN: 19h47m
REC. TIME: 0h02m
FAVORITE PROGRAM: OVRWRITE
COMPLETE
2
FINE
HDD TIMER RECORDING
HI SP DUBBING:
OFF
REC. MODE
ADVANCED
Press ' / " to select “FAVORITE
PROGRAMS”, then press SET/
ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
12/25 SAT 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1
PROGRAM NAME:
REG/CHNG PROG NAME
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
FAVORITE PROGRAMS
SETTING COMPLETE
REGISTER THIS TIMER PROGRAM
IN FAVORITE PROGRAM?
REGISTER OVERWRITE PROGRAM
REGISTER AS SERIAL REC
DON'T REGISTER
3
Press ' / " to select favorite
program register, then press SET/
ENTER.
• REGISTER OVERWRITE PROGRAM
• REGISTER AS SERIAL REC
• DON’T REGISTER
If you select “DON’T REGISTER”, the
screen in step 2 is displayed without
registration.
4
Set the interval of registered timer
recording.
• Press ' / " / \ / | to select from
either “WEEKLY”, “DAILY”, “MO-FRI”
or “MO-SAT”, then press SET/
ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM ADVANCED SETTINGS
12/25 SAT 10:31 AM – 10:33 AM CH 1
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
PROGRAM NAME:
REG/CHNG PROG NAME
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
FAVORITE PROGRAMS
SETTING COMPLETE
5
SELECT REPEAT PERIOD OF TIMER REC.
WEEKLY
DAILY
MO – FRI
MO – SAT
Press ' / " to select “SETTING
COMPLETE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Confirmation screen with “OK” button
is displayed. Press SET/ENTER.
• The screen in step 1 is displayed.
53
Timer Recording
Confirm, Change and
Cancel a Timer Program
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
Confirming the Content of a
Timer Program in Detail or
Change Its Content
4
The operation method is the same for both
HDD and DVD.
• You can confirm, change and cancel the
content of timer programs set by “EASY
REC. GUIDE”, “VCR Plus+”, “TIMER
PROGRAM” and “TIMER DUBBING”.
• The Timer Program List shows all timer
programs set.
TIMER PROGRAM LIST
CAN CHECK, CHANGE OR CANCEL TIMER PROGRAM.
5
Confirming
1
2
3
Press ' / " to select the program
to change, then press SET/
ENTER.
MEDIA
HDD
PROGRAM DATE&TIME
12 / 25 SAT 7 : 00 PM –
CH
7 : 30 PM CH 8
REC. MODE
SP
HDD
12 / 25 SAT
9 : 05 PM –
9 : 50 PM CH 8
FINE
HDD
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 30 PM – 11 : 00 PM CH 8
FINE
Press \ / | to select “CHANGE”,
then press SET/ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM LIST
Press START MENU to display
START MENU.
12 / 25 SAT
CHANGE
EXIT
• CANCEL: The confirmation screen
appears.
• CHANGE: The Timer Program screen
appears.
• EXIT: The screen in step 4 appears
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
6
VCR Plus+
Change the content of timer
program by following the steps on
pages 47 and 48.
Canceling a Timer Program
TIMER PROGRAM
FAVORITE PROGRAM
1
TIMER PROGRAM LIST
➡
MEDIA
HDD
CH 8
REC. MODE: FINE
FAVORITE PROGRAMS: NO
CANCEL
EASY REC GUIDE
TIMER PROGRAM LIST
CAN CHECK, CHANGE OR CANCEL TIMER PROGRAM.
9 : 50 PM
DO YOU WANT TO CANCEL, CHANGE OR EXIT WITHOUT CHANGING?
• The Timer Program List screen
appears.
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW FOR TIMER RECORDING OPERATION.
HDD
HI SP DUB PRIOR.: ON
Press ' / " to select “TIMER
PROGRAM LIST”, then press
SET/ENTER.
TIMER PROG/CHCK[TIMER PROGRAM LIST]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
9 : 05 PM –
REC. MEDIA:
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”, then
press SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
PROGRAM DATE&TIME
12 / 25 SAT 7 : 00 PM –
CH
7 : 30 PM CH 8
REC. MODE
SP
9 : 05 PM –
HDD
12 / 25 SAT
9 : 50 PM CH 8
FINE
HDD
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 30 PM – 11 : 00 PM CH 8
FINE
• EASY REC. GUIDE.... Blue (A)
• VCR Plus+.... Red (B)
• TIMER PROGRAMMING.... Green (C)
TIMER PROGRAM LIST
CAN CHECK, CHANGE OR CANCEL TIMER PROGRAM.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
MEDIA
HDD
PROGRAM DATE&TIME
12 / 25 SAT 7 : 00 PM –
CH
7 : 30 PM CH 8
REC. MODE
SP
HDD
12 / 25 SAT
9 : 05 PM –
9 : 50 PM CH 8
FINE
HDD
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 30 PM – 11 : 00 PM CH 8
FINE
➡
■ Press STRAT MENU or EXIT
to complete only the confirmation.
■ Press K/ Lto switch to
next (or previous) page.
■ Proceed to step 4 if you want to
confirm the content of a timer
program in detail or change its
content.
■ Press one of the Colored
buttons to select timer programming screen to add a timer
program.
Press ' / " to select timer
program to cancel on the Timer
Program List screen, then press
SET/ENTER.
TIMER PROGRAM LIST
12 / 25 SAT
9 : 05 PM –
REC. MEDIA:
HDD
HI SP DUB PRIOR.: ON
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
9 : 50 PM
CH 8
REC. MODE: FINE
FAVORITE PROGRAMS: NO
DO YOU WANT TO CANCEL, CHANGE OR EXIT WITHOUT CHANGING?
CANCEL
2
CHANGE
EXIT
Press \ / | to select “CANCEL”,
then press SET/ENTER.
• The confirmation screen appears.
3
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Selected timer program is canceled,
and the screen returns to Timer
Program List (step 1).
54
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcast (AV AUTO REC)
HDD
When connected to a satellite receiver, etc.
with a timer recording function, this Recorder
can be used to automatically record the timer
program. (Refer to the operation manual of
the satellite receiver, etc. for instructions on
how to set the timer program.)
Recording with
AV AUTO REC
1
• Set the recording timer on the satellite
receiver, etc. for the program you
wish to record. (Refer to the operation
manual of the satellite receiver, etc.
for instructions on how to set the
program timer.)
Example: Use of AV AUTO REC Function
Satellite
receiver, etc.
2:00 AM
Set timer
program
This Recorder
Set AV AUTO
REC function
3:00 AM
4:00 AM
Timer
Program
2:00 AM
3:00 AM
4:00 AM
Records
timer program
Recording
begins
5:00 AM
Timer
Program
2
3
5:00 AM
Recording
ends
Power
Power ON Power OFF Power ON
OFF
4
•
•
•
•
Connecting to a Satellite
Receiver, etc.
To use the AV AUTO REC function, connect
the satellite receiver, etc. to the LINE IN 1 (AV
AUTO REC) jacks on the rear of the Recorder.
The Recorder
To LINE IN 1
(AV AUTO REC) jacks
Video/audio cable
(supplied)
To video/audio
output jacks
Satellite receiver, etc.
1 Press HDD to select HDD
mode.
2 Press INPUT to select “L1”
(LINE IN 1 [AV AUTO REC]).
Recording
begins
Important!
The AV AUTO REC function only operates
when used with a satellite receiver, etc.
with timer recording functions.
The AV AUTO REC function will only
operate when the satellite receiver, etc. is
connected to the LINE IN 1 (AUTO REC)
jacks on the rear of the Recorder.
AV AUTO REC function is a function to
record to HDD. You cannot use this
function to record to DVD.
Recording mode is set to FINE when
recorded using AV AUTO REC. You
cannot choose any other recording mode.
Turn off the satellite receiver, etc.
• HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
Records
timer program
Recording
ends
Set up the satellite receiver, etc.
Select external audio.
• Set “EXTERNAL AUDIO” of “REC.
FUNCTION” to “STEREO” or “DUAL
MONO” (page 98).
• Set “DUAL MONO REC. SET” of
“REC. FUNCTION” to either “L CH” or
“R CH” when you set “HI SP DUB
PRIORITY” to “YES” (page 98).
5
Press POWER to turn off the
Recorder.
6
Press and hold AV AUTO REC
(under the cover) for more than
two seconds.
• External automatic recording function
switches on or off every time you
operate this function.
• “AUTO REC” is displayed on the front
display panel (page 18).
• Recording automatically starts and
stops when the Recorder receives a
signal from satellite receiver, etc. at
start time and stop time.
NOTE
• When recording PPV (pay-per-view)
programs of satellite broadcasts, always
make sure to set the satellite receiver, etc.
to “Record”. Certain programs may not be
recorded or require additional charges for
recording.
• Use AV AUTO REC in combination with a
satellite receiver, etc. equipped with a timer
recording function.
• Since the power of this Recorder is
switched on after the video signal from a
satellite receiver, etc. has been received,
the start of a program may not be
recorded.
• When using AV AUTO REC function, it is
recommended that you set the timer
recording start time a little earlier than
usual.
55
Automatic Recording of Satellite Broadcast (AV AUTO REC)
To Cancel the AV AUTO
REC Function
Before Recording
Press POWER.
• The Recorder is turned on and the AV
AUTO REC function will be canceled with
the “AUTO REC” indicator on the front
display panel turned off.
During Recording
Press REC STOP.
• The “AUTO REC” indicator will be turned
off.
• Timer recording is given priority when
timer recording and AV AUTO REC
times overlap.
56
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
Dubbing Method and Dubbing
Types
Limitation during Dubbing
Stopping the Dubbing in the Middle
You can dub from HDD to DVD and DVD to HDD. It is
recommended to dub important programs recorded on HDD
to DVD for safe keeping.
• Can dub up to five titles (programs) in one session.
• Cannot dub programs that are not recorded properly.
• When dubbing “Copy Once” enabled program from HDD
to DVD-RW (CPRM compatible) is stopped in the middle,
the part that was dubbed will be erased from HDD. If you
restart the dubbing, you can dub the remaining part as a
different title but overlap between title dubbed before and
after the stop might be off.
Dubbing Method
Dubbing Titles Including “Copy Once” Enabled Program
TIMER DUBBING
• When dubbing titles including “Copy Once”, enabled
program on HDD to DVD-RW, use DVD-RW (VR mode)
Ver. 1.1 CPRM compatible disc.
• “Copy Once” enabled program recorded to HDD will
move (recorded program will be erased after the move) to
DVD-RW. (You cannot dub in Video mode even if you use
DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 CPRM compatible disc.)
Can set to dub during times the Recorder is not used like
at midnight.
DUB NOW
Start dubbing immediately.
Dubbing Types
High Speed Dubbing
• Copy titles recorded to HDD without any change of image
quality and recording length. This Recorder can perform
high speed dubbing with no loss of image quality of data
so there is no degradation.
• Time to dub varies according to the recording mode of
title (program) to dub or type of disc you use.
• When a blank 2X speed compatible disc is initialized with
other DVD recorder, dubbing may be done at 1X speed
even if high speed dubbing is selected.
Example: Approximate time it takes to dub when you dub
program 1 hour long
Recording Mode of Source Title
Required time
FINE
SP
NOTE
• Even if you select “HIGH SPEED DUBBING”, you may not
be able to increase the speed of dubbing from 1✕
depending on titles you want to dub and type of disc.
• When title on HDD that includes “Copy Once” enabled
title is divided into several chapters, you can add all the
chapters to dubbing list by adding one of the chapters to
dubbing list.
Dubbing Direction and Dubbing
Speed
Dubbing
Direction
Dubbing Constant Speed
Speed (Rate Conversion
Dubbing)
LP
EP
Using a 2✕-speed
compatible disc
Approx. Approx.
30 min
15 min
Approx.
7.5 min
Approx.
5 min
HDD→DVD-RW
(VR mode)
Using a 1✕-speed
compatible disc
Approx. Approx.
60 min
30 min
Approx.
15 min
Approx.
10 min
HDD→DVD-R/RW
(VIDEO mode)
• Even if DVD-R is compatible to 4✕ speed dubbing the
Recorder will handle as disc compatible to 2✕ speed
dubbing.
• If you perform high-speed dubbing of a “Copy Once”
program, dubbing will not be done at 2✕-speed, even if
you use a 2✕-speed compatible disc.
Rate Conversion Dubbing (Constant Speed)
• Plays back titles of HDD and dubs to DVD-R/RW or plays
back titles of DVD-R/RW and dubs to HDD.
• Selects picture quality (recording mode) for dubbing. You
can select among 32 levels of recording modes so it is
convenient when you want to fit the programs into one
disc.
• You can select among 32 levels of recording mode by
using Manual setting but picture quality will not exceed
the quality of original.
• Time to dub is about the same as time required to record
the title in the beginning.
DVD-R/RW→HDD
*1
*2
✕
High Speed
(High Speed
Dubbing)
*1
✕
✕
√
✕
—
✕ Can dub.
— Cannot dub.
√ Can High Speed Dub the recorded title if it is recorded
using “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.
*1 Can just move the original title if that title is “Copy Once”
enabled.
*2 Cannot dub “Copy Once” enabled title.
NOTE
• You cannot operate other functions while dubbing.
—Timer programming will not start while dubbing.
—You cannot record to HDD or playback titles on HDD
while dubbing.
• Exact recording will not operate along with TIMER
DUBBING.
57
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
Title Name and Chapter Mark Copied
during Dubbing
• Title name and chapter mark are as follows:
Rate Conversion Dubbing
Title Name
Chapter
Mark
HDD↔DVD (VR mode)
✕
✕
HDD→DVD (Video mode)
✕
*1 —
✕
—
Title Name
Chapter
Mark
DVD (VIDEO mode)→HDD
High Speed Dubbing
*2
HDD→DVD (VR mode)
✕
HDD→DVD (VIDEO mode)
✕
✕
*3
✕
✕ Can dub.
— Cannot dub.
*1 Chapter mark of the dubbed title will not be copied
when you dub from HDD to DVD-R/RW (Video mode)
using rate conversion dubbing function. The chapters
will be inserted according to the setting of auto chapter
(either “10 min”, “15 min”, or “30 min”).
*2 You cannot dub from a finalized DVD-R/RW (Video
mode) to HDD.
*3 During dubbing from HDD to DVD-R/RW (Video mode)
maximum chapter marks that could be dubbed using
high speed dubbing is 99 per title.
• Thumbnail will not be dubbed.
Rate Conversion Dubbing
Limitation of Rate Conversion Dubbing
• “DOLBY VIRTUAL SURROUND” (page 76) will be set to
“OFF” when rate conversion dubbing is used.
• “DD OUTPUT LEVEL” (page 103) is set to “NO” when rate
conversion dubbing is used.
• The image might look longer vertically when you dub 16:9
image from HDD to DVD-R/RW (Video mode) using rate
conversion dubbing. In such case, adjust TV setting to
correct the playback image.
• Chapter marks might shift slightly when dubbed using
rate conversion dubbing.
Dubbing from HDD to DVD
Limitation when Dubbing from HDD to DVDR/RW (Video Mode)
You cannot dub from HDD to DVD-R/RW in following cases:
• Total number of titles in DVD-R/RW reached 99 or total
number of chapters reached 999.
• HDD or DVD-R/RW is either recording or playing back.
High Speed Dubbing
Dubbing from DVD to HDD
Limitations on High Speed Dubbing when
Dubbing from HDD to DVD (Video Mode)
You cannot dub from DVD-R/RW to HDD in
following cases:
• Dubbing timer needs at least same amount of time it took
to record original title even in case of high speed
dubbing. You cannot timer record at same time you set
dubbing timer. (Example: If you set 2 hours of high speed
dubbing from 2 AM, you cannot set other timer recording
during 2-4 AM.)
• During high speed dubbing, you cannot monitor the
program being dubbed on the TV screen.
• If you stop high speed dubbing in the middle of process
the recorded title might be erased.
• You cannot high speed dub from a play list.
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” (pages
52, 103)
• This function enables high-speed dubbing in both Video
mode and VR mode.
• If a title is recorded with “HI SP DB PRIORITY” set to
“NO”, you cannot perform high-speed dubbing in Video
mode. Use “RATE CONVERSION DUBBING” (page 59).
(This setting is unnecessary when performing high speed
dubbing into VR mode.)
• Cancel “HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” when you
want to edit frames of programs recorded to HDD using
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY”. You can edit the
frames after the cancellation.
• You cannot set “HIGH SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY” again
to the program that canceled “HIGH SPEED DUBBING
PRIORITY” once.
• You cannot record 16:9 and 4:3 screen size images in one
title.
58
• The Recorder continues to dub the title in same screen
size when it started dubbing even in case the screen size
of title changed in the middle.
• When you record a program with SAP broadcast with “HI
SP DUB PRIORITY” set to “YES”, either “MAIN” or “SAP”
audio is recorded according to the selected SAP mode.
See page 99 for details.
• When recording 16:9 size image in LP, EP, or MN1-17
recording modes, the image will be recorded as 4:3
(squeezed).
• Not enough HDD capacity. (When there is not enough
capacity in HDD, the Recorder will continue the dubbing
until there is no more capacity.)
• Total number of titles in HDD reached 199 or total number
of chapters reached 999.
• HDD or DVD-R/RW is either recording or playing back.
• When you try to do this, dubbing will be suspended.
When you dub a title that has both “Copy Once” and
“Copy Freely” enabled programs, only the “Copy Freely”
enabled program will be dubbed.
• You cannot dub a “Copy Once” enabled program
recorded on a DVD-RW to the HDD.
Dubbing from DVD to HDD
• You can only dub programs of DVD-R/RW (VR mode) to
HDD. You cannot dub a disc that used another recorder.
• You cannot dub a DVD-R/RW (Video mode) disc recorded
with this Recorder after it has been finalized.
If you cancel the finalization in DVD-RW (Video mode)
disc, you can dub programs.
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
Timer Dubbing/Dubbing
Immediately
(HDD↔DVD)
High Speed Dubbing
(HDD→DVD)
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
When dubbing from HDD to
DVD
Load a recordable disc onto the
disc tray, then press HDD.
• Load the disc formatted in either VR
mode or Video mode.
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
When dubbing from DVD to
HDD
Load a disc that recorded the title
you want to dub, then press DVD.
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
2
5
Press DUBBING.
Press ' / " to select the recording mode (picture quality), then
press SET/ENTER.
HDD ORIGINAL s DVD
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT THE RECORDING MODE
FINE (HIGH QUALITY)
SP (STANDARD)
LP (2X)
EP (3X)
MANUAL SETTING (MN)
ABLE TO MANUALLY SELECT
1 OF 32 LEVELS.
EXACT DUBBING
SELECT QUALITY BASED ON
REMAING DVD CAPACITY.
• You cannot select “EXACT DUBBING”
when you dub from DVD to HDD.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to dub, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Setting toggles between “dubbing”
and “dubbing canceled” each time
you press SET/ENTER.
• Select more titles when you want to
dub multiple titles. (You can dub up to
5 titles at once.)
Press ' / " to select “HIGH
SPEED DUBBING” or “RATE
CONVERSION DUBBING”, then
press SET/ENTER.
DUBBING
FINE
Selecting Exact Dubbing
• Select Exact Dubbing when there are
multiple titles (up to 5) you want to dub and
you know you cannot fit all into one disc.
The Recorder will select the appropriate
recording mode and fit all titles into one
disc (maximum 6 hours).
• You cannot set recording mode to each
titles when you select exact dubbing.
• You cannot dub titles in higher quality than
the original.
• The Recorder will lower the recording
mode when there is not enough capacity in
the disc to dub compared to the length of
all the titles (programs). Be aware that
original “Copy Once” enabled program will
be erased after dubbing.
DUBBING
HDD ORIGINAL s DVD
SELECTED TIME: 0h 10m
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DVD REMAN: 2h10m
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10 / 5 TUE
1
• Screen of step 5 will display when
you select “HIGH SPEED DUBBING”.
Dubbing from HDD to DVD
• When the DVD-R/RW is in Video
mode, if a title has been recorded
with HI SP DUB PRIORITY setting set
to “NO”, then select “RATE CONVERSION DUBBING”.
4
ABLE TO SELECT 1 OF 32 LEVELS OF PICTURE QUALITY
IN MANUAL REC. MODE BASED ON REMAINING.
LP
SP
EP
• You can select “DUBBING” in Start
Menu to dub.
• Screen of step 4 will display when
you dub from DVD to HDD.
3
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TIMER PROGRAM
DAILY 9:30 PM ~ 10:00 PM CH 1
DVD-R
• You can choose titles and chapters as the
unit to dub.
1
When “MANUAL SETTING (MN)” is
selected:
• Set picture quality with \ / |, then press
SET/ENTER. (Picture quality can be
selected from 32 levels.)
10 : 00 PM – 11 : 00 PM
2
4
SELECT
TITLE LIST
3
5
ENTER
6
SET TITLE TO DUB
CHAPTER
NEXT STEP
Dubbing mark displays to selected titles.
Numbers will be assigned in order of
selection and dubbing will start according to the numbers assigned.
6
7
Press Yellow (D) (NEXT STEP).
Press \ / | to select “DUB NOW”
or “TIMER DUBBING”, then press
SET/ENTER.
DUBBING
HDD ORIGINAL s DVD
SELECTED TIME: 0h 10m
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DVD REMAN: 2h10m
IF YOU SET TIMER DUBBING, YOU CAN START
DUBBING AT A SPECFIED TIME AUTOMATICALLY.
DUB NOW
TIMER DUBBING
• If you have selected “DUB NOW”, go
to step 10-2.
Continued on Next Page |||
59
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
8
1 Press ' / " to input start time
(hour), then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press ' / " to input start time
(minute), then press SET/ENTER.
DUBBING
HDD ORIGINAL s DVD
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECTED TIME: 0h 10m
DVD REMAN: 2h10m
IF YOU SET TIMER DUBBING, YOU CAN START
DUBBING AT A SPECIFIED TIME AUTOMATICALLY.
SET STARTING TIME, THEN SET AUTOMATIC FINALIZE (YES/NO)
(ONLY IN CASE OF DVD DUBBING).
DUB START TIME
0 : 00
AM
AUTOMATIC FINALIZE
OK
9
NO
CANCEL
Press ' / " to set “AUTOMATIC
FINALIZE” to “YES” or “NO” in
case you are dubbing to DVD.
Then press SET/ENTER.
• If you select “YES”, the Recorder will
automatically finalize the disc. The
finalized disc can be played back in
other DVD players.
• For details of finalizing, refer to page
106.
10 1 Press \ / | to select “OK” or
“CANCEL”, then press SET/
ENTER.
2 Press SET/ENTER at the
confirmation screen.
• Timer Dubbing is set. If you select
“DUB NOW” in step 7, dubbing starts
immediately.
To Stop Dubbing
Press DUBBING
• You can also stop dubbing by
pressing ■STOP/LIVE or REC STOP.
NOTE
• Message will display if timer recording and
timer dubbing overlap. Cancel overlapping
timer recording and set it again.
• If you set “AUTOMATIC FINALIZE” to “YES”
for timer dubbing from HDD to DVD,
finalization may take anywhere from a few
minutes to one hour extra after dubbing.
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite
program will always be shown at the end of
the list.
If there are more than one overwrite
program, they will be shown in the order of
timer recording. Note that even if you
select “SORT” in the title name list, the
display order will not change.
• When timer dubbing from DVD to HDD is
set, taking out the disc will cancel the timer
dubbing.
NOTE
Limitation of Timer Dubbing
• You can only set one timer dubbing at a
time. You cannot set multiple dubbing at
same time.
• You cannot set timer dubbing when you set
32 timer recordings in total (including Easy
Rec Guide, VCR Plus+, Timer Program). In
such case cancel timer recording by
selecting “TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK”
(page 54).
• “EXACT RECORDING” (page 98) will not
work for timer dubbing.
• After setting timer dubbing (dubbing on
standby or in the middle of timer dubbing),
you cannot perform operations such as
erasing, initialization and editing.
• When timer dubbing has been set, you
cannot dub a “Copy Once” enabled
program until the timer dubbing is
completed.
• If any overwrite program is recorded while
timer dubbing for an overwrite program is
on standby, it may not be dubbed properly.
Dubbing Titles Recorded to HDD to
Multiple DVDs
• Operate Edit (page 88) to create Play List
and dub Play List as a unit. (Example:
Dubbing programs more than 6 hours long
like a Christmas special in recording mode
you set.) If the original is dubbed as is
using a recording mode other than “EXACT
DUBBING”, the title will be dubbed
(moved) until the disc is full. (For a “Copy
Once” enabled program, the dubbed part
will be erased automatically from the HDD.)
Take out the dubbed disc and load a new
one to continue dubbing.
• In case you want to divide and dub a
“Copy Once” enabled program to several
discs, stop dubbing manually and reload
the disc.
Front Panel Display during
Dubbing
• PLAY indicator of media of original source
and REC indicator of media to dub light up
during dubbing.
• Front display panel shows dubbing
movement in orange during dubbing.
Example: Dubbing a program from HDD to
DVD.
Canceling Timer Dubbing
• You can cancel timer dubbing by selecting
“TIMER PROGRAM/CHECK” in START
MENU (page 54).
60
Dubbing indicator
Dubbing (HDD/DVD)
Dubbing Titles Recorded
as Favorite Program
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
You can dub HDD recorded favorite programs to DVD and keep in a safe place.
Dubbing SERIAL Program
1
Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST
(under the cover).
2
Press Green (C) (SERIAL PROGRAM).
3
Press ' / " to select program
name to dub, then press SET/
ENTER.
FAVORITE PROGRAM
SERIAL PROGRAM
PROGR. 1
PROGR. 2
4
10 Press ' / " to set “AUTOMATIC
FINALIZE” to “YES” or “NO” in
case you are dubbing to DVD.
Then press SET/ENTER.
11 Press \ / | to select “OK”, then
press SET/ENTER, and then
press SET/ENTER one more in
confirmation screen.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SATs
CH 8
MO – SA
CH 10
8 : 00 PM – 9 : 00 PM
FINE
10 : 00 PM – 11 : 00 PM
FINE
1 Press Green (C) (DUBBING).
2 Press ' / " to select title to
dub, then press SET/ENTER.
FAVORITE PROGRAM
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
NAME:PROGR.1
SETTING:SATs 8:00 PM - 9:00 PM
CH 33 FINE
BACK
1
2
3
4
5
TITLE
CH33 2004/10/ 2 PM 08:00 Sa
CH33 2004/10/ 9 PM 08:00 Sa
CH33 2004/10/16 PM 08:00 Sa
CH33 2004/10/23 PM 08:00 Sa
CH33 2004/10/30 PM 08:00 Sa
REC DATE
10 / 2 SAT
10 / 9 SAT
10 / 16 SAT
10 / 23 SAT
10 / 30 SAT
TIME
60 MIN
60 MIN
60 MIN
60 MIN
60 MIN
• You can select titles continuously.
• The Recorder will dub in order of
selection.
5
6
Press Yellow (D) (NEXT STEP).
Press ' / " to select “HIGH
SPEED DUBBING” or “RATE
CONVERSION DUBBING”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Refer to steps 4 and 7-10 on pages
59 and 60 for details about operations
in steps 7-10 below.
7
Press ' / " to select the recording mode (picture quality), then
press SET/ENTER.
• When you select High Speed
Dubbing, you cannot select recording
mode. Go to step 8.
8
Press \ / | to select “DUB NOW”
or “TIMER DUBBING”, then press
SET/ENTER.
• If you have selected “DUB NOW”, go
to step 11.
9
1 Press ' / " to input start time
(hour), then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press ' / " to input start time
(minute), then press SET/
ENTER.
61
Eliminating problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)
When You Cannot Record
Problem
•
•
•
•
•
No disc in the Recorder.
Unrecordable disc is loaded.
Not enough disc capacity.
Recorder cannot identify the disc.
Disc is protected.
• Not enough HDD capacity.
• In the middle of dubbing.
Suggested Solution
• Load recordable DVD.
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD for
recording.
• Erase recorded programs you don’t want from HDD to create
necessary capacity to record.
• You cannot record during dubbing. Stop dubbing before
recording.
When You Cannot Dub
Problem
• Title protection is set to copy once
enabled title (program).
• No disc in the Recorder.
• Unrecordable disc is loaded.
• Not enough disc capacity.
• Recorder cannot identify the disc.
• Disc is protected.
• Not enough HDD capacity.
• In the middle of recording/playback.
• Recorded “Copy Once” enabled title
(program) to DVD.
Suggested Solution
• You cannot dub Copy Once enabled title (program) that is
title protected.
• Load recordable DVD.
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.
• Erase recorded programs you don’t want from HDD to create
necessary capacity to record.
• You cannot dub during recording/playback.
• “Copy Once” enabled title (program) or title with signal that
prohibits copying recorded to DVD cannot be dubbed to
HDD.
When You Cannot High Speed Dub
Problem
•
•
•
•
•
•
No disc in the Recorder.
Unrecordable disc is loaded.
Not enough disc capacity.
Recorder cannot identify the disc.
Disc is protected.
Trying to high speed dub from HDD to
DVD in Video mode.
• Cannot High Speed Dub although
“HIGH SPEED DUBBING” is selected.
62
Suggested Solution
• Load recordable DVD.
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.
• You cannot high speed dub from HDD to DVD in Video mode
if “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” was not set to “YES” when the
original title was recorded to HDD.
• Use 2X-speed compatible disc.
• High speed dubbing of “Copy Once” enabled title will take
longer than normal high speed dubbing.
Eliminating problems (Recording, Timer Recording, Dubbing)
When You Cannot Timer Record
Problem
•
•
•
•
•
No disc in the Recorder.
Unrecordable disc is loaded.
Not enough disc capacity.
Recorder cannot identify the disc.
Disc is protected.
• Not enough HDD capacity.
• Number of timer programs set has
reached the limit.
• Dubbing recorded title.
• Playing back the DVD.
• In the middle of direct recording.
Suggested Solution
• Load recordable DVD.
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD for
recording.
• Erase recorded programs you don’t want from HDD to create
necessary capacity to record.
• Erase unnecessary timer programs.
• Timer recording does not work during dubbing. Stop dubbing before timer recording.
• Stop playing back the DVD more than 3 minutes before timer
recording starts. If you don’t stop playback until timer
recording start time, timer recording will not start.
• Timer recording does not function during direct recording.
Stop direct recording before the preset start time for timer
recording.
When You Cannot Timer Dub
Problem
• In the middle of recording, timer
recording, HDD playback, or disc
playback.
• Title protection is set to “Copy Once”
enabled title (program).
• Recorded “Copy Once” enabled title
(program) to DVD.
•
•
•
•
•
•
No DVD in the Recorder.
Unrecordable disc is loaded.
Not enough disc capacity.
Recorder cannot identify the disc.
Disc is protected.
Playing back the DVD.
• In the middle of dubbing.
Suggested Solution
• Timer dubbing does not work during recording, timer recording, HDD playback, and disc playback. Stop recording, timer
recording, HDD playback, and DVD playback before timer
dubbing.
• You cannot timer dub title protected “Copy Once” enabled
title (program).
• “Copy Once” enabled title (program) or title with signal that
prohibits copying recorded to DVD cannot be timer dubbed
to HDD.
• Load recordable DVD.
• Load recordable DVD with enough capacity.
• Cancel disc protection or change to new recordable DVD.
• Stop playing back the disc more than 3 minutes before timer
dubbing starts. If you don’t stop playback until timer dubbing
start time, timer dubbing will not start.
• Timer dubbing does not work during dubbing.
NOTE
• If you set multiple timers, and the programmed times overlap, or the end time of the previous timer is the same as the start
time of the next timer, timer recording will begin after the preceding timer recording finishes. There will be a delay of up to 1
minute before the next timer recording begins.
63
HDD Playback
REC LIST: If you select the program you want
to watch from the list of recorded programs
(REC LIST) and press SET/ENTER, playback
will begin.
NOTE
• To display the counter during playback,
press ON SCREEN (page 33).
To playback edited video:
• When playing back video which has been
edited (for example, by making a play list),
use Seamless Playback for smoother
connection between scenes.
• For details on “SEAMLESS PLAYBACK”
settings, see page 103.
HDD
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
SWITCHED TO HDD MODE.
NOTE
• To playback a play list created by editing,
press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST.
Each time this button is pressed, the
setting will toggle between “ORIGINAL”
(original titles) and “PLAY LIST”.
2
Press |PLAY.
• PLAY indicator (for HDD) on the front
of Recorder is lit green during
playback.
• To fast forward or fast reverse: Press
JFWD or GREV during playback.
HD D
OR I G IN AL
F I NE REMA IN 18 h59m
1 / 3 8
4 / 6
0 0 : 2 0 : 0 0
Each time these buttons are pressed,
the speed cycles through the
following settings:
Press |PLAY to return to normal
playback.
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
3
64
Resume playback function
• If you press |PLAY again, playback will
resume from the point where it was
previously stopped.
• To playback from the beginning, press
■STOP/LIVE again and then press
|PLAY.
Inserting Chapter Marks
during Playback
Playback
1
NOTE
• The final few seconds may not be played
back, depending on how the recording was
stopped.
• The end position of the program played
back may be shifted slightly from the
position where recording was stopped
during recording.
Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop
playback.
• You can insert chapter marks by pressing
CHAPTER MARK (under the cover).
Chapter marks are inserted after the
message “RECORDED CHAPTER MARK.”
appears.
• You cannot insert chapter marks during
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.
HDD Playback
Playback from REC LIST
HDD
1
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
2
Press REC LIST to display REC
LIST (THUMBNAIL).
• The REC LIST can also be displayed
from the START MENU (see page 29).
• To switch between Original Title List
and Play List, press ORIGINAL/PLAY
LIST. Each time the button is
pressed, “ORIGINAL” (original titles)
or “PLAY LIST” is selected in turn.
ORIGINAL
PLAY LIST
REC LIST(HDD: ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH 33 FINE
2
4
3
5
When the REC LIST is displayed, you can use
the following functions by pressing Blue (A)
or Red (B) on the remote control.
• Switch between Thumbnail screen and Title
Name List screen by pressing Blue (A).
• When Thumbnail screen is selected, switch
between Title List and Chapter List by
pressing Red (B).
Chapters in selected title will be displayed
in Chapter List.
• Sort the Title List in the “From New”, “From
Old” or “Title Name (alphabetical)” order.
1 Press Red (B).
2 Press \ / | to select “FROM NEW”,
“FROM OLD” or “TITLE NAME”, then
press SET/ENTER.
Icons Displayed in Title Info
Field of REC LIST
NEW TITLE
Displays HDD only.
(Will not display in case you playback,
edit, or set Title Protection.)
TITLE INFO: 10/ 2 SAT 8:00 PM – 9:00 PM
1
About REC LIST
6
• If you press Blue (A) (TITLE LIST),
you can switch to title list.
" TITLE LIST
REC LIST(HDD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE PROTECTION
(HDD, DVD-RW [VR mode] only)
OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM
(HDD only)
SERIAL PROGRAM
(HDD only)
“Copy Once” enabled Program
(Copy Restricted) (HDD only)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/ 2 SAT 8:00 PM – 9:00 PM
BACK
1
2
3
4
5
6
NEXT
TITLE
CH33 FINE 2004/10/ 2 SAT
CH33 FINE 2004/10/ 9 SAT
CH33 FINE 2004/10/16 SAT
CH33 FINE 2004/10/23 SAT
CH33 FINE 2004/10/30 SAT
CH33 FINE 2004/11/ 6 SAT
FROM NEW
P
P
P
P
P
P
REC. DATE
10 / 2 SAT
10 / 9 SAT
10 / 16 SAT
10 / 23 SAT
10 / 30 SAT
11 / 6 SAT
ENTER ENTER
SELECT
B SORT
THUMBNAIL
n
STR. TIME TIME
8 : 0 0 PM 60 MIN
8 : 0 0 PM 60 MIN
8 : 0 0 PM 60 MIN
8 : 0 0 PM 60 MIN
8 : 0 0 PM 60 MIN
8 : 0 0 PM 60 MIN
7/ 15
HI SP DUB PRIORITY SETTING
(HDD only)
RETURN
FUNC. MENU
• Press Blue (A) (THUMBNAIL) to
switch from title list to thumbnail.
3
Press ' / "/ \ / | to select the
program you want to watch.
Thumbnail screen: Press ' / " to
switch pages.
Title Name List screen: Press ' / " to
select a title name.
4
Press SET/ENTER or |PLAY.
• Playback begins.
To Stop Playback
Press ■STOP/LIVE.
NOTE
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite
program will always be shown at the end of
the list.
If there are more than one overwrite
program, they will be shown in the order of
timer recording. Note that even if you select
“SORT” in the title name list, the display
order will not change.
65
HDD Playback
Playback by Selecting
Title Number (Direct Playback)
HDD
HDD
You can start playback from the title you want
to see.
1
Viewing Favorite
Programs
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
When you play back “Favorite Programs”
recorded on HDD, follow the operations
below.
1
Press HDD to select HDD mode.
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
2
Press DIRECT while playback
stops or during playback.
2
3
Press ' / " to select the title
number you want to see, then
press SET/ENTER.
Press FAVORITE PROG. LIST
(under the cover).
3
Press Green (C) to select
“OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM” or
“SERIAL PROGRAM”.
4
Press ' / " to select program
you want to watch, then press
SET/ENTER.
Title number currently
selected
1
/ 38
FAVORITE PROGRAM
OVERWRITTEN PROGRAM
• Playback starts from the beginning of
the selected title.
PROGR. 1
PROGR. 2
NOTE
• You can select the title number to play
back by using Function Control screen
(page 75).
PROGR. 3
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SAT
CH 1
DAY
CH 1
2 : 03 AM –
FINE
6 : 20 AM –
FINE
2 : 05 AM
6 : 22 AM
NOT REGISTERED
• When you select “OVERWRITTEN
PROGRAM”, playback of selected
program starts.
5
Press ' / "/\ / | to select the
title you want to watch, then press
SET/ENTER.
• Playback of “SERIAL PROGRAM”
selected in Thumbnail starts.
NOTE
• Refer to pages 49 and 53 about the details
of register and recording of Favorite
Programs.
66
HDD Playback
Other Types of Playback
HDD
• This section explains other types of HDD
playback operations.
Fast Forward/Reverse
(Search)
Still Picture Playback/
Frame Advance Playback
This feature enables still playback and frame
advance playback.
1
• Playback pauses.
• PLAY indicator (for HDD) on the front
of Recorder blinks during Still Picture
Playback.
Use to fast forward/reverse programs being
played.
1
Press JFWD or GREV during
playback.
Example: When JFWD is pressed
• The search speed will cycle as
follows each time you press the
button.
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
Press FSTILL/PAUSE during
playback.
2
Press Lor Kto advance or
reverse playback image frame by
frame.
• Press Lto advance one frame.
Press Kto reverse one frame.
3
Press |PLAY to return to normal
playback.
Skip Search
2
Press |PLAY to cancel the
search.
• Search will be canceled and playback screen is displayed.
• You cannot fast forward or fast
reverse from one title and continue to
another title.
• When you fast forward or fast reverse
to the end or beginning of the title,
normal playback screen is displayed
automatically.
This lets you skip about 30 seconds ahead.
This is convenient when you want to skip
commercials while viewing.
Press SKIP SEARCH during playback.
• You can skip approximately 30 seconds
forward each time you press the button.
• The maximum interval you can skip at one
time is 120 seconds (4 button presses).
• Skip Search will not work during Time Shift
Viewing.
Skipping to Next Chapter
Replay
You can skip the chapter using this function.
This lets you skip about 10 seconds back.
This is convenient for replaying a short scene
you missed.
Press Kor Lduring playback.
• Press Lto go to the start of the next
chapter.
• Press Konce to return to the start of
current chapter (track). If you press it again
(within about 5 seconds), it will skip to the
beginning of the previous chapter (track).
• This function does not work during Time
Shift Viewing.
Press REPLAY during playback.
• Playback reverses approximately 10
seconds, then starts again.
• Replay will not work during Time Shift
Viewing.
Slow Playback
This lets you play back video at slow speed.
1
Press
SLOW during playback.
• The slow playback speed will cycle
as follows each time you press the
button.
(Approx. 1/2g) (Approx. 1/8g) (Approx. 1/16g)
2
Press |PLAY to return to normal
playback.
• You cannot perform slow playback
over a boundary between titles. At
the end of the title, slow playback will
be canceled and normal playback
will be selected automatically.
67
HDD Playback
4
Switching Audio
Example: Repeat playback of a title
(TITLE)
You can change the audio output channel
during HDD playback.
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the
audio channels change.
• The way audio channels change differs
depending on the sound recorded on HDD.
See the table of SAP on page 99 for details.
NOTE
• When you play a program recorded in dual
mono, and if you are listening to the Dolby
Digital sound via the digital output jack,
you cannot select the audio channel. Set
“DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” to “PCM” (see
page 102, or if you want to change the
audio channel, listen via the analog output
jacks.
Zoom
You can magnify your favorite section.
Press
TITLE REPEAT
5
1
Press
(INPUT) during
playback.
2
Press \ / | to select “A-B”, then
press SET/ENTER.
3
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to start
Repeat Playback.
ZOOM: 1
Repeat Playback of a Title
or Chapter (Repeat Playback)
1
2
3
Play back the title or chapter you
want to repeat.
(INPUT).
Press
Press \ / | to select the type of
Repeat Playback.
• TITLE: Repeats the title currently
playing back.
• CHAPTER: Repeats the chapter
currently playing back.
• A-B: Repeats the specified scene of
title or chapter.
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.
TITLE
CHAPTER
\ | SELECT
ENTER
A-B
ENTER
• Press RETURN to cancel without
setting the type of Repeat Playback.
68
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
A-B Repeat Playback
(Repeat Playback of a
Specified Part)
ZOOM during playback.
• Each time you press this button, the zoom
setting cycles in the following sequence:
ZOOM: 1 (approx. 1.2✕) → ZOOM: 2
(approx. 1.5✕) → ZOOM: 3 (approx. 2.0✕)
→ OFF: (No display).
• You can move the enlarged part with ' /
" / \ / |.
• Zoom will not work during Time Shift
Viewing.
To return to the normal screen, press
ZOOM a few times and cancel Zoom mode.
Press SET/ENTER.
• The start point of the part (A) will be
memorized.
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.
TITLE
CHAPTER
A-B
SET START PT
ENTER
4
SET REPEAT START POINT
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to end
Repeat Playback.
• The end point of the part (B) will be
memorized and the Repeat Playback
for the specified part (A-B) starts.
5
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
NOTE
• For A-B Repeat Playback, set the start and
end points within the same title.
DVD/CD Playback
This section explains playback of DVD-R/RW
discs recorded with this Recorder, commercially available DVD Video discs (like movies)
and CDs.
• To playback a DVD-R/RW recorded with
this Recorder, select the title to be played
back, and then start playback.
• Display the list of initial images (thumbnails) for each title, and select a title. (REC
LIST)
1
Press POWER to turn the power
on.
2
Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the
disc tray.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
Load a disc on the disc tray.
• Insert the disc with the label face up.
• In case of disc recorded on both
sides, face the side you want to view
down.
4
Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the
disc tray.
DVD-R/RW Playback
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
1
DVD-R
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title (or chapter) you wish to view.
REC LIST(DVD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/11 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
2
4
5
Loading Disc
3
4
3
5
6
Press SET/ENTER.
• Playback will begin from the selected
title (chapter).
• PLAY indicator (for DVD) on the front
of Recorder is lit green during
playback.
6
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
To Record a Chapter Mark
during Playback
Press CHAPTER MARK (under the
cover).
• The message “RECORDED CHAPTER
MARK.” is displayed, and the chapter mark
is recorded.
• Chapter marks can be set during playback
only with DVD-RW (VR mode).
• Chapter marks cannot be set manually for
DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD-R or during
Simultaneous Recording/Playback.
NOTE
• If a title was set with another DVD recorder,
and it contains characters which cannot be
displayed with this Recorder, then “****....”
is displayed (up to 64 characters max.).
• If you play back a play list on a disc
recorded with another DVD recorder and 1
title is 12 hours or more in length, only 12
hours of that title will be played back.
Playback by Selecting Title
• To play back a disc recorded and finalized
in Video mode, press DVD TITLE, display
the “TITLE MENU” screen, and select a title
to play back.
DVD-RW
DVD-R
VIDEO MODE
1
SWITCHED TO DVD/CD MODE.
2
3
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
• HDD mode is selected automatically
when the power is turned on.
Load the disc you want to play
back.
2
Press REC LIST to display the
REC LIST (thumbnail) screen.
3
• See page 65 for details on how to use
the REC LIST.
• If the loaded disc has a play list and
you press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST, the
screen will switch to the play list
(page 80).
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
Load a disc recorded in Video
mode.
Press DVD TITLE.
• The “TITLE MENU” screen is
displayed.
Continued on Next Page |||
69
DVD/CD Playback
4
5
Press ' / " to select the title.
Press SET/ENTER.
• Playback of the selected title will
begin.
6
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
NOTE
• If a disc recorded in Video mode has been
finalized (pages 15, 106), a menu screen
will be created automatically to enable
playback with other DVD players. For that
reason, the menu screen is different before
and after finalization.
• If a title was set with another DVD recorder,
and it contains characters which cannot be
displayed with this Recorder, then “****....”
is displayed (up to 64 characters max.).
If there is a timer program which is set to
record on DVD:
• A message to that effect will be displayed 5
minutes prior to the start of the timer
recording. If that happens, stop DVD
playback and load the disc for recording.
• The timer recording will be canceled at the
start time of the timer recording if DVD
playback is still in progress.
Audio CD/Video CD Playback
VIDEO CD
Preparation
Press DVD and load a disc.
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
Playback from the beginning
1
DVD Video Playback
DVD VIDEO
1
Press DVD and load a disc.
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
• Playback may begin automatically,
depending on the disc.
2
Press |PLAY.
• Playback begins from the first title.
• The menu may be displayed first,
depending on the disc. Perform
playback operation by following the
directions on the screen.
• To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
70
Press |PLAY.
• Playback begins from the first track.
2
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
Playback by selecting the
track
1
1 Press DIRECT.
2 Select the track number to be
played back using the Number
buttons, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Playback starts from the selected
track.
Example: To select the 12th song
(track), press 1, then 2.
• You can also select the track by
pressing ' / " .
• DIRECT does not work when playing
back a video CD with PBC on.
Resume playback function
• If you press |PLAY next, playback will
resume from the point where it stopped the
previous time. To playback from the
beginning, cancel resume mode by
pressing ■STOP/LIVE then press |PLAY.
(Resume playback will be canceled when
you open the disc tray, turn the power off,
or switch to HDD.)
• Resume playback function does not work
during video CD playback.
AUDIO CD
2
To stop playback, press ■STOP/
LIVE.
Video CD (with PBC)
Playback
• Some video CD discs have Playback
Control (PBC) function which guides the
playback by the menu displayed.
Video CD (with PBC)
If you press |PLAY after you load a disc, the
menu displays. The functions of button
changes in the following manner during the
playback operation using the menu.
• Lbecomes the “NEXT” button.
• Kbecomes the “PREVIOUS” button.
Select the track number to be played back
from the menu using the Number buttons and
play back the track.
Example: To select the 5th track, press 0,
then 5.
(Operation method may differ depending on
the disc. Refer to the manual of the video
CD.)
Turning off PBC function when playing
back a PBC compatible video CD
Playback begins from track 1 when JFWD
is pressed before the menu is displayed after
you load a disc. Playback will follow the track
order like an audio CD.
* If you want to turn the PBC to “ON” when
playing back the CD with PBC off, press
■STOP/LIVE twice and then press |PLAY
to display the menu.
DVD/CD Playback
Other Types of Playback
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO CD
AUDIO CD
• This section explains other types of DVD
playback operations.
Fast Forward/Reverse
(Search)
Fast Forward/Reverse functions when
JFWD or GREV is pressed during
playback.
Example: When JFWD is pressed
• The search speed will cycle as follows
each time you press the button.
When playing back a DVD
Playback by Selecting a
Title (Track) Number (Direct
Playback)
Press DIRECT, then select title (track) number
to play back. See page 66 for details.
Repeat Playback of a Title
or Chapter (Repeat Playback)
1
2
3
Play back the title or chapter you
want to repeat.
(INPUT).
Press
Press \ / | to select the type of
Repeat Playback.
• TITLE: Repeats the title currently
playing back.
• CHAPTER: Repeats the chapter
currently playing back.
• A-B: Repeats the specified scene of
title or chapter.
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
When playing back a video CD or audio
CD
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g)
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.
TITLE
\ | SELECT
Skipping to the Beginning
of a Chapter (Track)
Skipping (to the beginning of a chapter or
track) functions when Lor Kis
pressed during playback.
ENTER
A-B
ENTER
• Press RETURN to cancel without
setting the type of Repeat Playback.
4
Press SET/ENTER.
Example: Repeat playback of a title
(TITLE)
Slow Playback
Slow Playback functions when
pressed during playback.
CHAPTER
SLOW is
(Approx. 1/2g) (Approx. 1/8g) (Approx. 1/16g)
Still Picture Playback/
Frame Advance Playback
• Still Picture Playback functions when
FSTILL/PAUSE is pressed during
playback. (If you are playing back an audio
CD, the CD will pause.)
• Frame Advance/Reverse Playback
functions when Lor Kis pressed
during Still Picture Playback.
• Frame Reverse Playback will not work
with DVD-RW (Video mode), DVD-R,
DVD Video and Video CD discs.
• PLAY indicator (for DVD) on the front of
Recorder blinks during Still Picture
Playback.
Skip Search
Playback skips 30 seconds ahead when
SKIP SEARCH is pressed during playback.
TITLE REPEAT
5
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
A-B Repeat Playback
(Repeat Playback of a
Specified Part)
1
Press
(INPUT) during
playback.
2
Press \ / | to select “A-B”, then
press SET/ENTER.
3
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to start
Repeat Playback.
• The start point of the part (A) will be
memorized.
SELECT TYPE OF REPEAT PLAYBACK.
TITLE
CHAPTER
A-B
SET START PT
Replay
ENTER
SET REPEAT START POINT
Playback reverses 10 seconds when
REPLAY is pressed during playback.
71
DVD/CD Playback
4
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to end
Repeat Playback.
• The end point of the part (B) will be
memorized and the Repeat Playback
for the specified part (A-B) starts.
5
Press
(INPUT) to return to
normal playback.
Function Control
You can do things like specify a title or
chapter, and adjust settings for video and
audio if you press FUNCTION (under the
cover) during playback. (For details see page
75.)
Switching Audio
You can change the audio output channel
using the AUDIO button (under the cover).
Each time AUDIO is pressed, the
audio channels change as follows:
AUDIO CD
2
Press ' / " to select the subtitles
you want to see.
• You can select by pressing SUBTITLE.
• The display indicates the subtitle
number currently being played back,
and the subtitles appear.
• To hide the subtitles, press \ / | a
few times and select “OFF”.
You can also select “OFF” by
pressing SUBTITLE or ' / " .
Zoom
You can magnify your favorite section by
pressing ZOOM during playback.
• Each time you press this button, the zoom
setting cycles in the following sequence:
ZOOM: 1 (approx. 1.2✕)→ZOOM: 2
(approx. 1.5✕)→ZOOM: 3 (approx.
2.0✕)→OFF (No display)
• You can move the enlarged part with ' /
" / \ / |.
ZOOM: 1
VIDEO CD
L+R
L
R
Switching Angle
DVD VIDEO
DVD VIDEO
The sound number which is currently played
back will be displayed.
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
The sound you can select varies depending
on the sound recorded on the disc. (page 99)
• When recording SAP broadcast or stereo,
the way audio channel changes may differ
depending on the recorded sound. See the
table of SAP on page 99 for details.
NOTE
• When you play a program recorded in dual
mono, and if you are listening to the Dolby
Digital sound via the digital output jack, you
cannot select the audio channel. Set
“DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” to “PCM” (see
page 102), or if you want to change the
audio channel, listen via the analog output
jacks.
Switching Subtitles
DVD VIDEO
If subtitles are provided in multiple languages, you can switch between them.
1
Press SUBTITLE (under the
cover) during playback.
• The display indicates the subtitle
number currently being played back,
and the subtitles appear.
• “✕✕” is displayed if a disc has no
subtitles.
72
If multiple angles are recorded, you can
switch between them.
Press ANGLE (under the cover)
during playback.
• The display indicates the angle number
currently being played back. Each time you
press this button, the angle switches.
• The angle can also be switched by
pressing ' / " .
• “✕✕” is displayed if a disc is recorded with
only one angle.
1
To return to the previous angle, press ANGLE
(under the cover) a few times to select the
original angle.
NOTE
• The following operations will not work when
playing back an audio CD:
Replay, Slow Playback, Frame Advance/
Reverse
Display of functions
• The display for subtitle, angle or audio
automatically disappears after 10 seconds.
The display can also be hidden by
pressing SET/ENTER.
Switching between functions
• You can switch subtitle, angle and audio at
the Function Control screen (page 75).
• Operation for each function varies depending on the disc. See the manual for the
disc.
DVD Playback
Fast Forward/Reverse
• You cannot perform Fast Forward/Fast
Reverse over a boundary between titles.
At the end or beginning of the title, Fast
Forward/Fast Reverse will be canceled and
normal playback will be selected
automatically.
• Audio is not played back during Fast
Forward and Fast Reverse.
• Subtitles are not played back with DVD
video discs and video CDs during Fast
Forward and Fast Reverse.
• Depending on the disc and the scene
being played back, the Recorder may not
operate at the speed listed in this manual
when performing Fast Forward.
Slow Playback
• You cannot perform Slow Playback over a
boundary between titles. At the end of the
title, Slow Playback will be canceled and
normal playback will be selected
automatically.
Still Picture Playback/Frame Advance
Playback
• The image may shift when using Frame
Reverse operation with a disc (like a DVD
video disc) other than a DVD-RW (VR
mode).
Repeat Playback
• Repeat Playback will not work during PBC
playback of a video CD with PBC (Playback Control).
• Repeat Playback may be forbidden
depending on the disc.
• A-B Repeat Playback may not work in
multi-angle scenes.
• For A-B Repeat Playback, set the start and
end points within the same title.
Playback by Selecting
with the Menu in the DVD
DVD-RW
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
2
• The selected title is played back.
NOTE
• The procedure explained on this page is
the basic operation procedure. Procedures
vary depending on the DVD video disc, so
operate by following the instructions in the
DVD video disc manual, or the instructions
displayed on the screen.
• A title menu is not displayed for a DVD-R/
RW (Video mode) if it has not been
finalized.
Title menu
• With some DVD discs, the title menu may
be explained using the name “Top Menu”.
For the button explained as the top menu
key, use DVD TITLE on the remote control.
• If no title menu is available, the title menu
will not display even if DVD TITLE is
pressed.
Using the Disc Menu
Example: Select “SUBTITLE LANGUAGE”.
1
2
Press ' / " to select “SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE”.
MENU
1 AUDIO LANGUAGE
2 SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
3 AUDIO
3
Press SET/ENTER.
• Screen to select subtitle language is
displayed.
4
Press ' / " to select the subtitle
language.
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
1
2
3
Playback by Selecting a
Title from the Title Menu
1
Press DVD MENU.
• The disc menu screen is displayed.
VIDEO MODE
• This section explains how to play back a
DVD video disc with a top menu or disc
menu.
• Titles listed in the title menu, and a disc
guide (for options like subtitles and audio
languages) are given in the disc menu.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title, then press SET/ENTER.
English
Español
Français
Press DVD TITLE.
• The title menu screen is displayed.
T I T L E MENU
1
Jazz
2
Latin
3
Classic
4
Rock
5
Press SET/ENTER.
73
MP3 File Playback
CD-R
MP3
CD-RW
MP3
NOTE
• When the DV input is selected, discs
cannot be played back if “DV LINK” is set
to “ON”. You can enjoy other sounds by
switching to other channels.
• See page 12 for details about the MP3 file
format.
1
2
Press DVD to select DVD mode.
Load an MP3 recorded CD-R or
the CD-RW, then press DVD
MENU.
CD MP3
1
1 WOLF
3 ANGEL
1
4
2 SHARK
1
4 TRISH
1
To Play Another File
(music title) during
Playback
1
Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop
playback.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the file
(music title) you want to play, then
press SET/ENTER.
• The chosen file (music title) will be
played.
To Skip the File during
Playback
Press SKIP
or
SKIP.
• Press SKIP
to skip forward.
• Press
SKIP to skip backward.
3
While the MP3 disc is playing
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
folder you want to play, then
press SET/ENTER.
• The file (music title) in the folder is
displayed on the file selection screen.
CD MP3
1 : 15
--:--:-WOLF
1 YOUNG
2 ANDREW
3 MAIN
4 BAY
5 BARDEN
6 QUEEN
7 BEACHES
9 YORK
8 VICTORIA
10 KING
• Press RETURN to return to the folder
selection screen.
• If you press |PLAY after selecting
the folder, the playback screen is
displayed, and the files in that folder
will be played from the beginning
repeatedly.
4
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the file
(music title) you want to play and
then press SET/ENTER.
• Playback will start from the selected
file (music title).
CD MP3
1 : 15
0 0 : 00 : 11
WOLF
1 YOUNG
2 ANDREW
3 MAIN
4 BAY
5 BARDEN
6 QUEEN
7 BEACHES
8 VICTORIA
9 YORK
5
74
10 KING
Press ■STOP/LIVE to stop
playback.
• Time Search is disabled.
• Programmed Playback is disabled.
• It is possible to repeat one track by
pressing
(INPUT).
• Dolby Virtual Surround does not operate.
Settings During Playback
Function Control Operation
Procedure
Function Control
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
This lets you make various settings at once,
like subtitle and angle setting, and title
selection for Direct Playback.
Depending on your preferences, you can
adjust video and enjoy audio with a greater
sense of presence. Operation is the same for
HDD and DVD.
1
Press FUNCTION (under the
cover) during playback.
• The Function Control screen is
displayed on the TV.
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO
1 / 3
5 / 2 5
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
2 ENGLISH
1
1
5 . 1 c h
OFF
OFF
OFF
Function Control screen
1
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO
1 / 3
5 / 2 5
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
2 ENGLISH
1
1
5 . 1 c h
OFF
OFF
OFF
n
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
3
ENTER
2
n
2
5
ENTER
ENTER
BIT RATE
0
10
Mbps
4
Press ' / " to select setting
items, then press SET/ENTER.
DVD VIDEO
VIDEO
1 / 3
5 / 2 5
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
2 ENGLISH
1
1
5 . 1 c h
OFF
OFF
OFF
2 Setting items
Selects a title or chapter for playback, or
performs video/audio settings.
n
4 Bit rate display
Displays the data rate of the video appearing
on the TV screen.
10
Mbps
1 Playback status display
Shows the operation status and the drive or
disc type.
3 Operation guide display
Provides help on how to operate with the
remote control buttons.
5
• For a description of each setting item,
see “Functions which can be set”
(page 76).
BIT RATE
0
SELECT
RETURN
3
SELECT
RETURN
ENTER
ENTER
BIT RATE
0
5
10
Mbps
Press ' / " / \ / | to set, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Operation may vary depending on
the setting item. Operate by following
the operation guide instructions on
the screen.
4
Press RETURN or FUNCTION
(under the cover) to close the
Function Control screen.
NOTE
• If “✕✕” is displayed for an option like title
number or subtitles, the disc has no titles
or subtitles which can be selected.
• When you press DIRECT or SUBTITLE, the
Function Control screen is closed.
• If you set to the Function Control screen
during playback of a DVD video, it may be
impossible to operate according to the
instructions from the DVD video. In cases
like this, operate again after canceling the
Function Control screen.
Continued on Next Page |||
75
Settings During Playback
Functions which can be set
Title Number (Direct Title Skip)
• Shows the title number being played back. You can
skip to the start of the title.
Chapter Number (Direct Chapter Skip)
• Shows the chapter number being played back. You
can skip to the start of the chapter.
Playback Elapsed Time (Direct Time
Skip)
• Shows the elapsed time from the beginning of the disc
to the present.
This lets you skip based on time.
• Press \ / | to move to the field of Hour, Minute,
Second, then press ' / " to set the time. Press SET/
ENTER to start playback from that set time.
Subtitle Language
• Shows the currently selected subtitle language.
If subtitles are provided in other languages, you can
switch to your preferred language.
Angle Number
• Shows the currently selected angle number.
If the video is recorded with multiple angles, you can
switch the angle.
Audio
• Shows the currently selected type of audio.
You can select the desired type of audio.
Digital Super Picture
• Emphasizes and enhances definition of details and
contours in the video. This reduces noise and makes
video easier to see.
• Press ' / " to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press \ / |
to set the level. Then press SET/ENTER.
• There is one setting level on the “soft” side and 3
setting levels on the “sharp” side.
• If you want to enjoy a more defined picture (with
detailed pictures), press | while “ON” is displayed for
Digital Super Picture. For old movies or videos with a
lot of noise, you can reduce noise for an easier to see
picture by pressing \ while “ON” is displayed for
Digital Super Picture.
76
Digital Gamma
• If a video is dark and hard to see, you can brighten the
dark parts for easier viewing by setting Digital Gamma.
Set this when watching discs with many dark scenes
(i.e. movie and concert discs), and when viewing a
disc in a bright room. This lets you see dark parts
better and enjoy video with a greater sense of depth.
• Press ' / " to select “ON” or “OFF”, then press \ / |
to set the level. Then press SET/ENTER.
• Digital Gamma can be set to three different levels.
Dolby Virtual Surround
• Lets you enjoy surround audio via analog connection
with a stereo type (2ch) TV or audio equipment.
• Even if you use a digital connection, Dolby Virtual
Surround will work in the following cases.
– When playing back linear PCM audio from a DVD.
– When playing back Dolby Digital audio while
“DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” (page 102) is set to
“PCM”.
• This Recorder uses a Spatializer System* for Dolby
Digital Surround.
* Certain audio features of this product manufactured
under a license from Desper Products, Inc.
Spatializer ® N-2-2™ and the circle-in-square device
are trademarks owned by Desper Products, Inc.
• If audio recorded monaurally is played back with
Dolby Virtual Surround ON, the audio level may
decrease, making it hard to hear. If this happens, turn
Dolby Virtual Surround OFF.
• Dolby Virtual Surround will not work in the following
cases:
– While watching a TV broadcast or external input.
– Multi-karaoke audio from a karaoke disc, 96 kHz 24bit linear PCM audio, or DTS audio.
• If you set Dolby Virtual Surround to “ON” and audio
sounds abnormal during playback, set it to “OFF”.
• There are no level settings.
NOTE
• These functions cannot be used with all discs.
Simultaneous Recording/Playback Function
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
VIDEO CD
DVD-R
DVD VIDEO
AUDIO CD
Plays back from HDD, DVD or CD while
recording a program onto HDD.
Viewing the Program
Being Recorded from the
Beginning while
Recording to HDD
(Chasing Playback)
1
Press |PLAY during recording.
• The program being recorded will play
back from the beginning.
2
Press G REV or J FWD
during Chasing Playback.
• Each time you press the buttons, the
Fast Reverse/Forward Playback
speed changes as shown below.
Playing Back a Title on
the HDD during DVD
Recording (Simultaneous
Recording/Playback)
1
• The HDD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
2
• Press | PLAY to return to the normal
playback speed.
3
Press ■STOP/LIVE to return to
the live broadcast which is being
recorded.
• Press REC STOP to watch normal
playback.
• For details on Chasing Playback, see
pages 36 and 37.
DVD/CD Playback during
HDD Recording
(Simultaneous Recording/
Playback)
1
Press DVD during HDD recording.
• The DVD button on the front of the
Recorder lights up.
2
Load a DVD or CD, then press
|PLAY.
• You can watch/listen to a DVD/CD
while continuing recording to HDD.
Play back the title in the HDD.
Viewing Another Program
Recorded on HDD while
Recording to HDD
(Simultaneous Recording/
Playback)
1
Press REC LIST during recording.
• The “REC LIST” (list of recorded
programs) is displayed.
(Approx. 2g) (Approx. 8g) (Approx. 32g)
Example: When J FWD is pressed
once
Fast Forward Playback 2✕ icon
Press HDD during DVD recording.
2
Press ' / " / \ / | to select
program you want to watch, then
press SET/ENTER.
• For details on program list operation,
see page 65.
NOTE
• Recording to HDD continues even while
playing back another program on the HDD
or a DVD/CD.
• ■STOP/LIVE is the button for stopping
playback. Recording will not stop. To stop
recording, press REC STOP.
• You cannot play back a DVD-R/RW while
recording to that same DVD-R/RW.
• You cannot start recording during playback
from HDD, DVD or CD.
• During Simultaneous Record/Playback, the
recording conditions may have an effect
on playback, but recording will still be done
correctly.
Checking the Program
Being Recorded during
Playback Using the Simultaneous Recording/Playback Function (Picture in
Picture)
• Press P IN P on the remote control.
A small picture is displayed on the
playback screen, so you can check the
program being recorded (or the program
which is stopped).
• Picture in Picture will not work during
Progressive Scanning Playback or audio
CD playback.
77
Function Menu
How to Use the
FUNCTION MENU
HDD
Allows you to call up “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”
from REC LIST and cancel High Speed
Dubbing Priority setting.
• The FUNCTION MENU can be called up
during HDD playback.
1
Press REC LIST or select REC
LIST in START MENU screen.
• The REC LIST screen is displayed.
2
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title you wish to cancel High
Speed Dubbing Priority setting
for.
Press YELLOW (D).
• The FUNCTION MENU is displayed
with the cursor at “HI SP DUB
PRIORITY”.
4
5
Press SET/ENTER.
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• Select “NO” if you do not wish to
cancel High Speed Dubbing Priority
setting.
12 / 25 SAT 9 : 54 AM
REC LIST
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO:1 0 / 4 MON 4 : 00 PM – 4 : 10 PM
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
CANCEL PRIORITY HIGH SPEED DUBBING
FOR THIS TITLE? CANNOT SET AGAIN
AFTER CANCELED.
YES
SELECT
6
ENTER
ENTER
NO
n
RETURN
Press EXIT to quit FUNCTION
MENU.
NOTE
• This feature cancels High Speed Dubbing
Priority setting for the title recorded with “HI
SP DUB PRIORITY” set to “YES”. When this
is canceled, limitations during editing are
relaxed, but the original state cannot be
restored.
78
Editing (HDD/DVD)
About Editing
Editing Procedure
Content that can be edited and editing operations vary
according to the recording mode.
Basic procedure for editing an original title
recorded in VR mode
Recordings on HDD, or on DVD-RW in
VR mode
Load a disc.
You can do various types of editing with this Recorder alone.
For example it is possible to create a compilation of your
favorite videos by gathering your favorite scenes from
recorded titles, moving scenes within a specified range, or
erasing unnecessary scenes. You can edit original videos
you have recorded into a Play List without changing the
content of the original videos.
Select the title to be edited, and edit.
NOTE
• If disc protection is set for a DVD-RW, it cannot be edited.
ORIGINAL
• A recorded video (title) in as is form is called an
ORIGINAL. A single recording (from record start to stop)
forms a single title.
PLAY LIST
• A title created by editing based on originals is called a
PLAY LIST. A play list can be remade any number of
times.
Original
Original
Original
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes from an Original Title
(ERASE SCENE) (page 81).
• Inputting/Changing Title Name (CHANGE TITLE
NAME) (page 83).
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page
84).
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page
85).
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)
(page 86).
• Disabling Title Edit and Erase (TITLE PROTECT) (page
86).
• Erasing All Titles (page 87).
• Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) (page 87).
Basic procedure for editing titles recorded in VR
mode after making a Play List
Load a disc.
Create a Play List.
Play List
1
2
3
4
NOTE
• A Play List is a list which describes the playback sequence of originals, and it does not actually copy the
originals. This makes it possible to perform editing while
using only a little disc space.
Recordings on DVD-R/RW in Video
mode
The following content can be edited.
• Input (change) title name (page 83)
• Erase title (page 87)
NOTE
• ERASE TITLE for a recording in Video mode will change
settings so that the “erased” title cannot be seen in the
“REC LIST”, but this does not mean that the video is
actually erased. (Free time on the disc will not increase.
With a DVD-RW recorded in Video mode, free time on the
disc will increase when the title recorded last is erased.)
• Editing is not possible if the disc has been finalized (page
106). With a DVD-RW, editing is possible again if finalization is canceled.
• Additional recording and editing can be done using only
this Recorder until the disc is finalized.
• Creating from Original Titles (page 88).
• Creating from Part of an Original (page 88).
Select and edit the created Play List.
• Erasing All Titles (page 87).
• Erasing by Selecting a Title (or Chapter) (page 87).
• Adding a Scene from an Original to a Play List (ADD
SCENE) (page 89).
• Changing the Title Sequence (MOVE TITLE) (page 91).
• Erasing Unnecessary Scenes (ERASE SCENE) (page
92).
• Inputting/Changing Title Name (CHANGE TITLE
NAME) (page 92).
• Changing Thumbnail (CHANGE THUMBNAIL) (page
92).
• Making Sections in a Title (DIVIDE CHAPTER) (page
92).
• Combining Chapters Together (COMBINE CHAPTERS)
(page 92).
NOTE
Editing cannot be done in the following cases.
• Play Lists cannot be created for discs recorded in Video
mode.
• Play Lists cannot be created for recordings on DVD-R.
• Finalized DVD-RWs (Video mode) cannot be edited.
(Editing can be enabled by canceling finalization.)
• A Play List cannot be created from original titles/chapters
containing a “Copy Once” enabled program which is
recorded on HDD.
• After setting timer dubbing (i.e. timer dubbing is on standby),
you cannot erase or edit the program being dubbed.
79
Editing (HDD/DVD)
Edit Screen
Title being
edited
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
2
01
00: 00: 02
00
SPECIFY ERASE
RANGE
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
Chapter
being edited
Time being
edited
Switching between
Original and Play List
(Play Lists can be created only
for HDD or VR mode)
Switching when the Recorder power is on
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST in the
stopped state. Each time this button is
pressed, the setting will toggle
between ORIGINAL and PLAY LIST.
Frame being
edited
• There is no frame display for titles recorded
(dubbed) with high speed dubbing priority,
or for titles recorded (dubbed) in Video
mode.
REMAIN 20h0m
1 0
1 0
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
Seamless Playback
This enables smooth playback at the
transitions between edited video scenes.
(However, a shift of about one second may
arise at the transitions, and part of the scene
may not appear.) (Page 103)
• Set this function by selecting: “START
MENU”→“OTHER SETTINGS” → “ADJUSTMENT” → “OPTION” → “SEAMLESS
PLAYBACK”.
High Speed Dubbing Priority
If a title is recorded onto HDD using high
speed dubbing priority, editing cannot be
done at the frame level. To perform editing at
the frame level, set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to
“NO” (pages 52, 58,103).
• Set this function by displaying “REC LIST”
and then selecting in order of: “FUNCTION
MENU” → “HI SP DUB PRIORITY”.
• If you have recorded a title with HI SP DUB
PRIORITY set to “YES”, and you want to
edit that title in frame units, cancel HI SP
DUB PRIORITY (page 78).
You cannot set “HI SP DUB PRIORITY” to
the title again once you cancel.
NOTE
• When you perform editing like adding a
chapter mark or erasing a scene, a slight
discrepancy may arise between the edit
screen and actually edited video.
• If you play back a disc edited at the frame
level with another DVD recorder, there may
be a shift in the start or end point, or the
screen may show a different thumbnail.
DVD-RW
VR OR IG IN AL
F I NE REMAIN 1h0m
1 /1
1 /1
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0
HD D
OR IG IN AL
F I NE REMAIN 20h0m
NOTE
• If recording is done while switched to play
list, the system will automatically switch
back to original.
Switching at the REC LIST
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST at the REC
LIST. Each time this button is pressed,
the setting will toggle between ORIGINAL
and PLAY LIST.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
REC LIST (DVD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
2
4
3
5
6
NOTE
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite
program will always be shown at the end of
the list.
If there are more than one overwrite
program, they will be shown in the order of
timer recording. Note that even if you
select “SORT” in the title name list, the
display order will not change.
Switching at Edit screen
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST at the EDIT
screen. Each time this button is
pressed, the setting will toggle between
ORIGINAL and PLAY LIST.
EDIT(DVD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
2
4
3
5
6
NOTE
• If a Play List has not been created, the
CREATE NEW screen appears.
80
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Erasing Unnecessary
Scenes from an Original
Title (ERASE SCENE)
HDD
5
• The selected title is paused.
TITLE: CH 33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
VR MODE
Selects a scene from an original video and
erase it.
• To erase all titles, see page 87.
• To erase by title (or chapter), see page 87.
1
2
PLAY
6
7
SET START POINT
Press |PLAY to start playback.
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene to be erased.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT/
ERASE
ENTER
• The erase start point is set. (Title
playback continues.)
Press ' / " / \ / | to select “EDIT/
ERASE”, then press SET/ENTER.
REC LIST
PLAY BACK
• Find the scene to be erased using
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,
K, L, or SLOW.
Press START MENU to display
START MENU screen.
START MENU[EDIT/ERASE]
2
01
00 : 00: 00
00
SPECIFY ERASE
RANGE
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
DVD-RW
NOTE
• Scenes cannot be erased on DVD-R/RW
(Video mode) discs.
Press ' / " to select “ERASE
SCENE”, then press SET/ENTER.
2
01
00: 00:12
00
SPECIFY ERASE
RANGE
DUBBING
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
ENTER
• If you fast reverse to a scene before
the start point, the start point will be
canceled.
• When the start point is set to near the
beginning of a chapter, the beginning
of the chapter will be selected as the
start point. To make the original
designated start point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just before. (page 86)
INFORMATION
SELECT
3
ENTER
n
ENTER
RETURN
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”, then
press SET/ENTER.
EDIT/ERASE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DELETES SCENE,
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.
EDIT
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).
ERASE ALL TITLES
ERASE TITLES
8
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.
TITLE PROTECT / OFF
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the end of scene to be
erased.
• The erase end point is set. (The title
will pause.)
RETURN
• The Original Edit Title List screen
appears.
4
SET END POINT
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit, then press Yellow
(D) (EDIT MENU).
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
CONFIRM CONTENT
AFTER ERASING?
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
2
01
00: 00:32
00
TITLE: CH33 FINE
n RETURN
CONFIRMING
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
1
2
4
5
SELECT
TITLE LIST
ERASE
3
ENTER ENTER
CHAPTER
6
n
RETURN
EDIT MENU
• Edit Menu Screen appears.
• When the end point is set to near the
end of a chapter, the end of the
chapter will be selected as the end
point. To make the original
designated end point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just after. (page 86)
Continued on Next Page |||
81
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
9
Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to
confirm the contents.
• The title is played back without the
scene to be erased.
Press Yellow (D) (ERASE) to
erase.
• Go to step 10.
• Press RETURN to cancel scene
erase.
10 Press \ to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
ERASE THIS SCENE?
DIVIDE CHAPTER
YES
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
NO
n
RETURN
• Erase begins.
When erase completes, the screen in
step 5 appears.
• If “C (UNDO)” is displayed, you can
undo edit by pressing Green (C).
• To quit scene erase, press RETURN.
Then the edit screen appears.
11 Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
NOTE
Selecting start and end points for scene
erase
• You cannot set a range shorter than 3
seconds.
• Once you erase a section of an original, it
is completely erased. It cannot be restored,
so be very careful and confirm before
erasing.
• Scenes can only be added and erased a
maximum of 50 times per title.
• If scenes have been added 51 or more
times to a disc using another DVD recorder.
Editing (Recording) may not function.
82
Searching for the Start
Point and End Point Scenes
The following playback operations are
available when searching for the start point
and end point scenes.
Playback
• If you press |PLAY, the currently paused
title will be played back.
Skipping to the start of a chapter
• If the scene to be selected is in another title
or chapter, first search for the title or
chapter using Kor L.
Searching for scenes in a chapter
• GREV and JFWD are convenient for
searching for a scene in a chapter.
Pause
• When you reach a scene near the start
point or end point, press FSTILL/PAUSE
to pause. This will make it easier to find the
scene. The start and end points may shift
slightly.
Frame Advance/Reverse
• If you press Lafter pause, the video
will start Frame Advance Playback. If you
press K, it will start Frame Reverse
Playback.
Final selection of scene
• To select a scene more accurately, use
slow playback starting a little before the
scene to be selected. This will keep you
from going beyond the scene.
If you press SLOW after pausing, you
can select a scene at your leisure during
slow playback of the video.
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Inputting/Changing Title
Name (CHANGE TITLE
NAME)
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
4
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit, then press Yellow
(D) (EDIT MENU).
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
DVD-R
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
• When you record, a title name including the
date, time and channel number is automatically created.
You can freely change this title name.
• You can input up to a maximum of 64
characters.
To input, perform the following steps in
order: “Select characters to be changed”
→ “Delete unnecessary characters
(characters to be changed)” → “Input new
characters”.
2
4
3
5
SELECT
6
n
ENTER ENTER
CHAPTER
TITLE LIST
RETURN
EDIT MENU
• Edit Menu screen appears.
5
1 Press ' / " to select
“CHANGE TITLE NAME”.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH 33 FINE
NOTE
• Title names cannot be changed in finalized
Video mode discs.
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
CHANGE TITLE NAME.
DIVIDE CHAPTER
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
2
• Title Name Change screen appears.
Press START MENU.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select “EDIT/
ERASE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
START MENU[EDIT/ERASE]
2 Press SET/ENTER.
6
Change Title Name.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH 33 FINE
CH 33 FINE 2004/10/4 4:00 PM|
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
A B C D E
EDIT/
ERASE
REC LIST
DUBBING
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
F G H
I
J
K L M .
(
)
?
:
!
;
Í
Î
Ï
#
$ %
" _
i
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
À
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
0
OTHER
SETTINGS
&
,
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å Æ Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
1
'
2
*
3
4
[
5
6
]
7
8
9
-
+
<
=
ß
>
{
|
}
˜
/
SELECT
BACK SPACE
\
^
ENTER
BACK
ENTER
ERASE
Ì
ERASE ALL
FORWARD
small
END
n
RETURN
SPACE
INFORMATION
SELECT
3
ENTER
n
ENTER
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
EDIT/ERASE
• For information on how to input
characters, see pages 51 and 52.
RETURN
7
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT
ERASE ALL TITLES
ERASE TITLES
TITLE PROTECT / OFF
SELECT
• The new title is set, and the screen in
step 5 displays.
DELETES SCENE,
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.
Press Green (C) (UNDO) to
return to the previously set title.
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.
• The title returns to original name.
• Operate according to the instructions
of the screen.
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
Press ' / " / \ / | to select “END”
and then press SET/ENTER
After input is finished.
8
Press EXIT to quit editing.
• Edit mode will terminate.
83
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Changing Thumbnail
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)
HDD
5
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
DVD-RW
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
Changes the still frame picture displayed at
the Thumbnail screen of the REC LIST to your
favorite scene within the title.
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
6
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
SCENE ERASE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTERS
Press ' / " / \ / | to select “EDIT/
ERASE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
1
01
00: 00 : 12
14
SELECT SCENE FOR
THUMBNAIL
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT/
ERASE
REC LIST
• Find the scene you want to use as a
thumbnail using JFWD, GREV,
FSTILL/PAUSE, K, L, or
SLOW.
DUBBING
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
7
INFORMATION
SELECT
Press |PLAY to start playback.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
Press START MENU.
START MENU[EDIT/ERASE]
1
00
00 : 00 : 00
00
SELECT SCENE FOR
THUMBNAIL
Before Starting Editing
3
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
VR MODE
1
2
1 Press ' / " to select
“CHANGE THUMBNAIL”.
ENTER
n
ENTER
RETURN
Press SET/ENTER when you
reach the scene you want to use
as a thumbnail.
• Playback is paused.
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
EDIT/ERASE
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DELETES SCENE,
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.
EDIT
PUT THIS
SCENE IN THE
THUMBNAIL?
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).
ERASE ALL TITLES
ERASE TITLES
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.
TITLE PROTECT / OFF
8
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
2 Press SET/ENTER.
• The new Thumbnail screen is set, and
the system returns to the screen in
step 5.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit, then press Yellow
(D) (EDIT MENU).
Press Green (C) (UNDO) to
return to the previously set
thumbnail.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT (HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
• Operate according to the instructions
of the screen.
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
1
2
4
SELECT
TITLE LIST
3
5
ENTER ENTER
CHAPTER
9
6
n
Press EXIT to quit Thumbnail
edit.
• Edit mode will terminate.
RETURN
EDIT MENU
• Edit Menu screen appears.
84
1 If this is the screen you want,
select “YES” by pressing \ / |.
• If you select “NO”, you can return to
step 5 and select the scene again.
RETURN
• The Original Edit Title List Screen
appears.
4
1
01
00 : 00: 41
12
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Making Sections in a Title
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)
HDD
6
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
VR MODE
Divides a title into multiple chapters and
make editing and dubbing of chapter as unit
easier.
• Find the scene to erase using
JFWD, GREV, FSTILL/PAUSE,
K, L, or SLOW on the
remote comtrol.
Before Starting Editing
7
Press START MENU.
Press SET/ENTER at the point
where you want to divide.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
Press ' / " / \ / | to select “EDIT/
ERASE”, then press SET/
ENTER.
START MENU[EDIT/ERASE]
2
01
00 : 00 :00
04
SELECT POSITION
TO DIVIDE
THIS CHAPTER.
• You can set chapter divisions by pressing
CHAPTER MARK (under the cover)
during recording or playback.
1
2
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
DVD-RW
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
Press |PLAY to start playback.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
1
01
00 : 00: 12
04
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DIVIDED CHAPTER?
EDIT/
ERASE
REC LIST
DUBBING
YES
EDITS/ERASES RECORDED TITLES
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
8
INFORMATION
3
EDIT
ERASE ALL TITLES
ERASE TITLES
TITLE PROTECT / OFF
4
To cancel a chapter division,
press Green (C) (UNDO).
• Operate according to the instructions
on the screen.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
DELETES SCENE,
CREATES / EDITS PLAYLIST.
9
ERASES ALL TITLES ON DISC
(EXCEPT PROTECTED TITLES).
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
• To continue dividing, repeat steps 5
to 7.
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
EDIT/ERASE
NO
Press EXIT to quit editing.
• Edit mode will terminate.
ERASES SELECTED TITLES.
DISABLES EDIT/ERASE TITLES.
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to edit, then press Yellow
(D) (EDIT MENU).
NOTE
• Divide a chapter to make it 3 or more
seconds. You cannot divide a chapter into a
section which is less than 3 seconds.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
1
2
4
5
3
5
6
Press ' / " to select “DIVIDE
CHAPTER”, then press SET/
ENTER.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
2
01
00 : 00: 00
04
SELECT POSITION
TO DIVIDE
THIS CHAPTER.
85
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Combining Chapters
Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)
HDD
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Combines two adjacent chapters into a single
chapter.
NOTE
• You cannot combine chapters automatically recorded when a scene was erased.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
Disabling Title Edit and
Erase (TITLE PROTECT)
HDD
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Disables edit and erase so you cannot
mistakenly change or erase the content of a
title.
Lets you safely save a disc for which editing
is in progress.
• This operation will not work with Video
mode discs.
• Titles created with Play List (page 88)
cannot be protected.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START
MENU screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
1
2
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
2
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title you wish to edit.
Press ' / " to select “TITLE
PROTECT/OFF”, then press SET/
ENTER.
4
Press Red (B) (CHAPTER) to
select Chapter Thumbnail screen.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
title to protect, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
chapter to combine, then press
Yellow (D) (EDIT MENU).
1
2
Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START
MENU screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
• Each time the button is pressed, the
setting toggles between “PROTECT”
and “UNPROTECT”.
TITLE PROTECT OR NOT(HDD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
3
TITLE INFO: 10/13 WED 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
4
5
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
2
4
RETURN
3
5
6
EDIT MENU
TITLE
6
7
1
6
Press SET/ENTER.
• The protect mark
is attached to
protected titles.
(The protect mark can be confirmed
at either the “REC LIST” screen or
“EDIT” screen.)
Press ' / " to select combine
procedure you prefer, then press
SET/ENTER.
• Select from: “COMBINE W/PREV”,
“COMBINE W/NEXT” or “DON’T
COMBINE”.
• If you select “COMBINE W/PREV” or
“COMBINE W/NEXT”, the two
chapters will join, and Chapter
Thumbnail screen is displayed.
• If you select “DON’T COMBINE”, the
previous screen displays.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
4
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
To Cancel Title Protect
1
Select the title protected in step 3
above, and press SET/ENTER.
• Title protect is canceled, and the
protect mark disappears.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
COMBINE CHAPTERS
COMBINE W/PREV
COMBINE W/PREV CHAP
COMBINE W/NEXT
COMBINE W/NEXT CHAP
DON'T COMBINE
CANNOT COMBINE CHAPS
8
86
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
NOTE
• If “DVD DISC PROTECTION” is set for a
DVD-RW (VR mode) disc, protection cannot
be canceled for individual titles. Cancel
“DVD DISC PROTECTION” (page 104).
2
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
Editing an Original Title (HDD/DVD)
Erasing All Titles
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
This erases the entire contents of a HDD or
DVD-RW. (Except titles for which title protect
has been set.)
You can erase the following:
• HDD (ORIGINAL):
Erases all titles recorded on the HDD.
When originals are erased, play lists are
also erased.
• HDD (PLAY LIST):
Erases all play lists created on the HDD.
Even if play lists are erased, the original
titles are not erased.
• DVD (ORIGINAL):
Erases all titles recorded on DVD. When
originals are erased, play lists are also
erased.
• DVD (PLAY LIST):
Erases all play lists created on DVD. Even if
play lists are erased, the original titles are
not erased.
NOTE
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, you
can no longer erase all titles.
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
2
3
Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START
MENU screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
Press ' / " to select “ERASE
ALL TITLES”, then press SET/
ENTER.
Press ' / " to select what you
want to erase, then press SET/
ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ERASE ALL TITLES
SELECT AN ITEM BELOW TO ERASE ALL TITLES
Erasing by Selecting a
Title (or Chapter)
HDD
• Carefully confirm before executing
erase.
• If you select “NO” and enter, the
screen in step 3 appears.
5
6
Press EXIT to exit from Edit
mode.
DVD-R
Before Starting Editing
• Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START
MENU screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
2
Press ' / " to select “ERASE
TITLES”, then press SET/ENTER.
3
Press ' / " / \ / | to select titles
to erase.
• If you press Red (B) (CHAPTER), the
screen will switch to the chapter
thumbnail display so you can select
and erase chapters.
4
Press SET/ENTER.
• If there are other titles (chapters) you
wish to erase, select with ' / " / \ / |
and press SET/ENTER.
5
6
Press Yellow (D) (ERASE).
Press \ / | to select “YES”.
• Once a title (chapter) has been erased,
it cannot be restored. Carefully confirm
before executing erase.
• If you select “NO” and enter, operate
from step 4 again.
7
Press SET/ENTER.
• All selected titles (chapters) are erased.
• To cancel erase, press Green (C)
(CNL ERSE).
• Operate according to the instructions
on the screen.
Press SET/ENTER.
• All titles (or play lists) are erased, and
the screen in step 3 appears.
To restore the erased content, press
Green (C) (CNL ERSE). Operate
according to the instructions on the
screen. (Note: You can only undo
once, to the state immediately before
the last erase.)
VIDEO MODE
NOTE
• Up to a maximum of 20 titles (chapters)
can be selected at one time.
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, you
can no longer select and erase titles.
• You cannot erase chapters in DVD-R/RW
discs (Video mode).
HDD (PLAY LIST)
Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Allows you to select titles to erase, and erase
them in a batch.
• When erasing original titles:
If original titles are erased, those titles will
also be erased from play lists.
• When erasing play lists:
Even if play lists are erased, the original
titles will not be erased.
HDD (ORIGINAL)
4
DVD-RW
8
Press EXIT to exit from Edit mode.
NOTE
• A title which is recorded as an overwrite
program will always be shown at the end of
the list.
If there is more than one overwrite
programs, they will be shown in the order
of timer recording. Note that even if you
select “SORT” in the title name list, the
display order will not change.
87
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
Creating a Play List
HDD
5
DVD-RW
VR MODE
You can create a Play List by copying a title
or chapter units from an original. Also you can
select your favorite scenes from originals, and
compile them into a Play List.
1 Press ' / " to select “COPY
TITLE/CHAPTER”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
•REC LIST (Thumbnail) screen of the
original appears.
6
1 Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
to copy.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
NOTE
•Operations like “COPY TITLE/CHAPTER”
and “COPY SPECIFIED SCENE” do not
actually copy the original titles. These
operations merely write the information
“make this original title a title in the play
list”. Therefore, you can edit without
decreasing free space in the disc or
touching the original titles.
•When creating a play list from original titles,
the original title’s thumbnail and chapter
mark information are not copied.
•You cannot create a play list of “Copy
Once” titles (program) recorded on HDD.
Before Starting Editing
•Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
1
2
4
3
5
6
•To select a chapter, press Red (B)
(CHAPTER).
2 Press SET/ENTER.
•The selected title (chapter) becomes
a Play List title.
Creating from Part of an
Original
You can select a desired scene from an
original title, and make it into a Play List title.
Creating from Original
Titles
1
Makes a single original title into a play list
title.
Perform steps 1-4 of “Creating
from Original Titles” in the left
column.
2
1 Press ' / " to select “COPY
SPECIFIED SCENE”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
1
Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START
MENU screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
3
2
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”, then
press SET/ENTER.
3
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
the PLAY LIST screen.
4
•The screen switches to the Play List
Edit Screen.
•There still is no title at this point, so a
“NEW” title frame with no image is
displayed.
•To create a new Play List later, select
the “NEW” title frame.
5
Press ' / " / \ / | to select title to
copy, then press SET/ENTER.
•To select from a chapter, press Red
(B) (CHAPTER) and select the
chapter.
Press |PLAY to start playback.
•Find the scene to copy using
FSTILL/PAUSE, JFWD, GREW,
K, L, or SLOW.
Press SET/ENTER at the place
where you want to start copying.
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
SELECT EDIT OR CREATE PLAYLIST
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
CREATE NEW
SPECIFY A RANGE
TO COPY.
NEW
4
ENTER
Press SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
SPECIFY THE RANGE TO SET PLAYLIST
FROM THE ORIGINAL THEN CREATE PLAYLIST.
COPY TITLE/CHAPTER
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT.
COPY SPECIFIED SCENE
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO
AND ADD IT.
SELECT
88
2
01
00 : 00 : 12
00
ENTER
ENTER
n
PREVIOUS
SET END POINT
•If you fast reverse to a scene prior to
the start point, the start point will be
canceled.
•When the start point is set to near the
beginning of a chapter, the beginning
of the chapter will be selected as the
start point. To make the original
designated start point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just before. (page 86)
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
6
Find the place where you want to
end copying, then press SET/
ENTER.
•If you press RETURN, you can
reselect the start point.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
Adding a Scene from an
Original to a Play List
(ADD SCENE)
HDD
TITLE: CH33 FINE
1
07
00 : 00 : 32
14
CONFIRM CONTENT?
•When the end point is set to near the
end of a chapter, the end of the
chapter will be selected as the end
point. To make the original
designated end point effective, set it
again after linking up with the chapter
just before. (page 86)
7
8
DVD-RW
VR MODE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
CREATE NEW
Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to
confirm the content.
Press Yellow (D) (CREATE) to
execute copy.
Go to step 8.
Adds video selected from an original to the
end of play list titles.
NOTE
•The selected scene cannot be added if
adding it will make the title longer than 12
hours.
•Scenes can be added as long as the
length of the title after adding is less than
the maximum of 12 hours.
Before Starting Editing
•Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START
MENU screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
•You can reselect the end point by
pressing RETURN.
2
1 Press \ / | to select “YES”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”,
then press SET/ENTER.
3
1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
to switch to Play List screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
to edit.
SAVE AS A NEW PLAYLIST?
YES
EDIT(HDD PLAY LIST)
NO
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
1
•One play list title is created.
2
3
NEW
NOTE
Selecting start or end point to add a scene.
•You cannot set a range shorter than 3
seconds.
4
5
6
3 Press Yellow (D) (EDIT
MENU).
4
Press ' / " to select “ADD
SCENE” then press SET/
ENTER.
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
ADD CHAPTER/TITLE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT
DIVIDE CHAPTER
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND
ADD IT
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
Continued on Next Page |||
89
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
5
Adding a Title or Chapter
•If you fast reverse to a scene prior to
the start point, the start point will be
canceled.
•When the start point is set to near the
beginning of a chapter, the beginning
of the chapter will be selected as the
start point. To make the original
designated start point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just before. (page 86)
1 Select “ADD CHAPTER/TITLE”,
then press SET/ENTER.
2 Select a title (chapter) at the
title (chapter) list, then press
SET/ENTER.
Go to step 9.
Specifying and Adding a
Scene
8
• Select “SPECIFY SCENE TO
ADD”, then press SET/ENTER.
Go to step 6.
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
Press SET/ENTER at the end of
the scene you want to add.
•Press RETURN to reselect the start
point of the scene. You can press
RETURN to reselect the end point
even after it is already set.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
ADD CHAPTER/TITLE
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
SELECT ORIGINAL TITLE/CHAPTER AND ADD IT
DIVIDE CHAPTER
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
SPECIFY SCENE TO ADD
SELECT A SCENE FROM ORIGINAL VIDEO AND
ADD IT
SELECT
6
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
PLAY
7
PLAYBACK
ENTER
9
2
01
00 : 00: 00
04
SPECIFY RANGE TO
ADD
SET START POINT
1 Press |PLAY to start playback.
•Find the scene to add using FSTILL/
PAUSE, JFWD, GREV, K,
L, or SLOW.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
PLAY
PLAYBACK
ENTER
2
01
00 : 00 :12
00
SPECIFY RANGE TO
ADD
SET START POINT
2 Press SET/ENTER at the start
point of the scene you want to
add.
ERASE SCENE
CHANGE TITLE NAME
CHANGE THUMBNAIL
DIVIDE CHAPTER
ADD SCENE
MOVE TITLE
PLAY
90
PLAYBACK
2
01
00 :00: 32
09
SPECIFY RANGE TO
ADD
ENTER
SET END POINT
ADD
•When the end point is set to near the
end of a chapter, the end of the
chapter will be selected as the end
point. To make the original
designated end point effective, set it
again after combining up with the
chapter just before. (page 86)
•The selected title (chapter) pauses.
TITLE: CH33 FINE
CONFIRM CONTENT?
n RETURN
CONFIRMING
Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
(chapter) to edit, then press SET/
ENTER.
EDIT(HDD ORIGINAL)
2
01
00: 00: 32
09
Press Red (B) (CONFIRMING) to
confirm the content.
Press Yellow (D) (ADD) to add.
•If you press Red (B) (CONFIRMING),
you can test play the added scene,
from the start point to the end point. It
may take about one minute for the
confirm screen to appear.
•Press Yellow (D) (ADD) to add.
10 1 Press \ / | to select “YES”.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
•The scene is added after the selected
title, and stored as a new title of the
play list.
11 Press EXIT to exit from EDIT
mode.
•A chapter mark is automatically set at
the start point where the scene is
added.
NOTE
•When adding a scene, select a scene
which continues for at least 3 seconds.
Scenes shorter than 3 seconds cannot be
added.
•Scenes can only be added and erased a
maximum of 50 times per title.
•If you press G REV or Kand reverse
beyond the start point after setting a start
point, the start point will cancel.
•If scenes have been added or erased 51 or
more times to a single title in a disc using
another DVD recorder, Editing (Recording)
may not function.
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
Changing the Title
Sequence (MOVE TITLE)
HDD
6
•If a point prior to the selected title is
selected as the destination, the title
will move to the point immediately
prior to the selected title.
•Press Green (C) (UNDO) to restore to
the state before the movement.
Operate according to the instructions
on the screen.
DVD-RW
VR MODE
Freely changes the sequence of titles.
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
Press SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT EDIT OR CREATE PLAYLIST
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
1
2
TITLE INFO: 10/6 WED 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
NEW
1
3
4
2
4
SELECT
TITLE LIST
ENTER
n
ENTER
5
6
RETURN
SELECT
TITLE LIST
Before Starting Editing
•Switch to the drive (HDD or DVD) to
be edited.
1
3
5
ENTER
RETURN
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
2
2
Press ' / " to select “EDIT”, then
press SET/ENTER.
4
3
1 Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST
to switch to Play List screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select title
to edit.
TITLE LIST
3
5
n
6
RETURN
UNDO
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the
destination cursor is set to Title 1, Title 3
is moved to the spot in front of Title 1.
•If a point after the selected title is
selected as the destination, the title
will move to the point immediately
after the selected title.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
n
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
TITLE: CH33
Select “EDIT/ERASE” in START
MENU screen, then press SET/
ENTER.
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
ENTER
2
NEW
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE: CH33 FINE
3
4
5
TITLE INFO: 10/7 THU 8:09 PM – 8:14 PM
1
n
ENTER ENTER
SELECT
CHAPTERS
TITLE LIST
2
3
RETURN
EDIT MENU
4
3 Press Yellow (D) (EDIT
MENU).
4
Press ' / " to select “MOVE
TITLE”, then press SET/ENTER.
5
Press ' / " / \ / | to select the
thumbnail to move the title to.
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
SELECT
TITLE LIST
5
ENTER
6
ENTER
n
EDIT(HDD PLAYLIST)
TITLE: CH33 FINE
RETURN
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
TITLE INFO: 10/6 WED 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
2
3
TITLE INFO: 10/8 FRI 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
4
1
2
5
n
4
SELECT
TITLE LIST
Selected title
6
3
5
ENTER
TITLE LIST
6
ENTER
n
UNDO
Example: If Title 3 is selected and the
destination cursor is set to Title 4, Title 3
is moved to the spot after Title 4.
RETURN
Cursor on the
thumbnail to move
the selected title to
RETURN
7
Press EXIT to exit from EDIT
mode.
91
Editing a Play List (HDD/DVD)
Erasing Unnecessary
Scenes (ERASE SCENE)
HDD
DVD-RW
Making Sections in a Title
(DIVIDE CHAPTER)
HDD
VR MODE
VR MODE
Selects and erases unnecessary scenes.
Even if you erase a scene in a play list, this
will not affect the original video.
Divides a title into multiple chapters. This
makes editing and dubbing in chapter units
more convenient.
1
1
Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/
ERASE” in START MENU, then
press SET/ENTER.
•The Thumbnail screen appears.
2
3
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display Play List (Thumbnail)
screen.
Erase the scene using the same
operation used for erasing an
original scene (step 4 on page 81step 11 on page 82).
Inputting/Changing
Title Name
(CHANGE TITLE NAME)
HDD
DVD-RW
You can input up to 64 characters.
1
Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/
ERASE” in START MENU, then
press SET/ENTER.
3
3
HDD
HDD
1
3
VR MODE
1
Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/
ERASE” in START MENU, then
press SET/ENTER.
•The Thumbnail screen appears.
2
3
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display Play List (Thumbnail)
screen.
Change the thumbnail using the
same operation used for changing
an original thumbnail (steps 4 -9
on page 84).
Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/
ERASE” in START MENU, then
press SET/ENTER.
•The Thumbnail screen appears.
Change or input the title name
using the same operation used for
changing or inputting an original
title (steps 4 -7 on page 83).
Changes the image of title displayed in REC
LIST to a scene you like in the title.
DVD-RW
VR MODE
2
DVD-RW
Divide a title into chapters using
the same operation used for
chapter division of originals
(steps 4 -9 on page 85).
This lets you combine two adjacent chapters
into a single chapter.
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display Play List (Thumbnail)
screen.
Changing Thumbnail
(CHANGE THUMBNAIL)
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display Play List (Thumbnail)
screen.
Combining Chapters
Together
(COMBINE CHAPTERS)
•The Thumbnail screen appears.
2
Select “EDIT” at the “EDIT/
ERASE” in START MENU, then
press SET/ENTER.
•The Thumbnail screen appears.
2
VR MODE
92
DVD-RW
Press ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST to
display Play List (Thumbnail)
screen.
Combine chapters using the same
operation used for chapter
combination of originals (steps 3
-7, left column on page 86).
NOTE
•You cannot combine chapters automatically recorded when a scene was erased,
or chapters recorded due to adding (with
ADD SCENE).
Enjoying High Quality Sounds
Playing 2 Channel Audio with an
Analog Connection
The Recorder
(Red)
(White)
To AUDIO
Output jacks
Audio cable
(commercially available)
(Red)
(White)
Playing Dolby Digital
(5.1 Channel) and DTS Audio with
a Digital Connection
• Connecting an amplifier with a Dolby Digital/DTS digital
surround processor or a Dolby Digital/DTS digital
surround amplifier to the Recorder’s coaxial or optical
DIGITAL AUDIO Output jack (terminal) provides richer,
more powerful audio play.
• To enjoy DTS Digital Surround audio, select DTS audio at
the disc menu during DVD playback, or select DTS audio
using the AUDIO button (under the cover) of the remote
control.
■ Connection to a processor or amplifier with an optical
or coaxial digital input jack (terminal)
The Recorder
To amplifier
audio input jacks
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
COAXIAL jack
Audio equipment, etc.
Jack and Plug Colors
Audio Left: White
Audio Right: Red
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
OPTICAL terminal
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
COAXIAL jack
or
Optical digital cable
(commercially available)
Coaxial digital cable
(commercially available)
NOTE
• When connecting audio equipment using analog
connection, we recommend that you set “DD OUTPUT
LEVEL” to “NO” (see page 103).
If you set to “YES”, audio may sound abnormal during
disc playback.
To coaxial digital
input jack
To optical digital
input terminal
Dolby Digital (5.1ch)/
DTS processor or amplifier
Important!
• When using this connection, set “DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT” to “Dolby Digital” (see page 102).
NOTE
• To play a disc recorded with DTS, you need to use DTS
processor or amplifier.
• This connection is not possible if the processor or
amplifier to which you want to connect does not have an
optical or coaxial digital input jack (terminal).
• Refer to the operation manual for the processor or
amplifier for information about connecting to it.
93
Enjoying High Quality Sounds
Playing 2 Channel Audio with a
Digital Connection
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder or
Other Audio Equipment without a Dolby
Digital Decoder
The Recorder
Audio CD or Video CD
• You can enjoy these discs by playing them back by the
ordinary playback procedure. (The normal audio output
is not played back for discs recorded with DTS.)
DVD Video Disc
DIGITAL AUDIO Output
COAXIAL jack
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
OPTICAL terminal
To DIGITAL
AUDIO Output
COAXIAL jack
or
Optical digital cable
(commercially available)
Coaxial digital cable
(commercially available)
To coaxial digital
input jack
To optical digital
input terminal
Audio equipment with an
optical or coaxial digital
input terminal
Important!
• When using this connection, set “DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT” to “PCM” (see page 102).
Digital Connection to an MD Recorder to Record a CD
• When you are using a digital connection to record
the contents of a CD to an MD, the track numbers of
the CD may not match the track numbers recorded
to the MD.
94
• There is no audio signal generated for DVD video discs
recorded with DTS. A processor or amplifier equipped
with a DTS Surround decoder function is required to enjoy
DTS audio.
Recording from External Equipment
Recording from a Digital
Camcorder Using i.LINK
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
DVD-R
• When this Recorder is connected with a DV-format
camcorder using a DV cable, you can record and edit
with minimal deterioration of picture and sound quality
using a digital signal.
• You can also display an operation panel for digital
camcorder control on the screen, and operate using the
buttons on the panel. This allows easy recording onto
disc. Record after first performing “DV SETTING” (page
104) at the START MENU.
* i.LINK is a function that lets you control other equipment
by input and output of video, audio, data and control
signals between equipment having an i.LINK terminal.
* i.LINK refers to the IEEE1394-1995 industry specification
and extensions thereof. The
logo is used for products
compliant with the i.LINK standard.
is a trademark.
* i.LINK
NOTE
• The DV IN terminal of this Recorder only enables input of
DV-format camcorders (DVC-SD signals). It is not
compatible with satellite receivers or Digital VHS video
recorders since they employ a different format.
• To connect the Recorder with a digital camcorder, set
digital camcorder POWER to “PLAY (Video side)”, and
connect while in the stopped state. If the DV is connected
when POWER is set to “RECORD (Camera side)”, or
when tape has been played back, the DV link will not
work correctly.
• There are some digital camcorders which cannot be
operated using the On-Screen Control Panel of this
Recorder, even if you set “DV LINK” under “DV SETTING”
to “ON”. In cases like this, set “DV LINK” to “OFF”. (page
104)
• When this Recorder is connected to a camcorder
equipped with a DV terminal, the signal may not be input
to this Recorder depending on the camcorder. When this
happens, use an analog connection (page 97).
(Use analog connection when using the VL-DC3U video
camera made by Sharp.)
• The DV IN terminal is not compatible with connection to a
PC.
• This Recorder cannot be controlled from other equipment
connected to the DV IN terminal.
• Only one camcorder can be connected to this Recorder
using the DV IN terminal.
• Connect this Recorder and the camcorder directly. The
DV signal will not be input if the camcorder is connected
to this Recorder through other equipment with a DV IN
terminal.
Input of Video, Audio and Data Signals
Æ Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette
memory cannot be recorded with this Recorder.
Æ Video and audio signals of protected material or
“Copy Once” material cannot be recorded.
Æ Monaural audio cannot be input through the DV IN
terminal.
Audio Mode
Digital camcorders typically have the following two audio
modes.
16-bit (48 kHz)
Although this yields high sound quality, only one stereo
audio signal can be processed.
12-bit (32 kHz)
Two stereo signals can be processed. In general,
overdubbed audio is recorded in Stereo 2.
Æ This Recorder allows listening or recording of either
Stereo 1 or Stereo 2 audio if the input audio is in the 12-bit
audio mode.
Æ This Recorder is unable to process 44.1 kHz input audio
signals.
Connecting a Digital Camcorder
Using the DV IN Terminal (i.LINK)
Refer to the user’s manual provided with the camcorder for
information on the procedure for connecting the camcorder
with this Recorder.
The Recorder
To DV IN terminal
Digital camcorder
To DV terminal
DV cable
(commercially available)
Before connecting, set the power
switch of the digital camcorder to
“Video (Playback)” and stop the
camcorder.
95
Recording from External Equipment
Recording with This Recorder (DV
Capture)
1
2
Press HDD or DVD to select the media to
record to.
Select audio to be input from the digital
camcorder.
• Before starting recording, check setting of “DV
AUDIO INPUT” using “DV SETTING” (page 104).
3
Press INPUT to select “DV”.
• The setting will cycle as follows each time you press
the button.
L1 (IN 1)
TV channels
4
L2 (IN 2)
DV (DV IN)
L3 (IN 3)
Perform digital camcorder playback.
• Press ' / " / \ / | to select the desired button on
the On-screen Control Panel, then press SET/
ENTER to operate.
When “DV LINK” is set to “ON”
DV LINK (ENABLES CONTROL OF DV CAMCORDER)
PLAYBACK
00 : 00 : 10
PLAYBACK
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
EXIT
EXIT
Select | on the On-screen Control Panel to
start playback, then press SET/ENTER.
• If you press EXIT on the remote control, the Onscreen Control Panel will disappear. To display it
again, press ON SCREEN (under the cover).
5
Press ●REC when you reach the scene you
want to start recording.
• The Recorder will start recording.
6
Press REC PAUSE when you want to pause
recording.
• Press REC PAUSE again to cancel pause.
7
Press REC STOP when you want to stop
(end) recording.
NOTE
• Material protected with a copy guard cannot be recorded.
• Date and time data as well as the contents of cassette
memory cannot be recorded.
• There are some digital camcorders which cannot be
operated using the On-screen Control Panel, even when
“DV LINK” is set to “ON”. In such cases, set it to “OFF”.
(See page 104.)
96
Important!
Abnormal images may be recorded or the Recorder
enters the Pause mode when any of the following
occur during DV capture.
• When the connected equipment plays back a portion
where nothing is recorded or video containing a copy
guard signal.
• When the DV cable is disconnected or the camcorder
power is turned off during DV capture.
• When playback from the camcorder is stopped.
Recording from External Equipment
Recording from a Camcorder
(VCR) Using an Analog
Connection
HDD
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
1
2
Select audio to be input from the external
equipment.
To record to HDD
• Switch audio of the external equipment to the audio
you want to capture.
To record to DVD
• Select audio using “EXTERNAL AUDIO” (page 98).
• Select “L CH” or “R CH” with “DUAL MONO REC.
SET” (page 98) to record in Video mode.
DVD-R
Material from a camcorder can be recorded with this
Recorder using an analog connection. You can capture
video by connecting a camcorder or VCR to the LINE IN 1,
2 or 3 jacks of this Recorder.
NOTE
• More vivid images can be viewed by connecting the SVIDEO IN jack on this Recorder with the S-video Out jack
on the camcorder using an S-video cable.
• Some camcorders may be required to be connected
using a special cable.
• Refer to the operation manual provided with the
camcorder for further information on the procedure for
connecting the camcorder.
• Material protected with a copy guard cannot be recorded. It may be impossible to get the correct video,
even if you just view without recording.
• Date and time as well as the contents of cassette memory
cannot be recorded with this Recorder.
• If you input video from an external equipment to this
Recorder, there will be a slight difference in image quality
between the video viewed from the external equipment
directly on the TV, and video viewed as external input to
the Recorder.
Press HDD or DVD to select the media to
record to.
3
Press INPUT to set the connection to external input channel (example: L3).
• The setting will cycle as follows each time you press
the button.
L1 (IN 1)
TV channels
4
5
L2 (IN 2)
DV (DV IN)
L3 (IN 3)
Play back the camcorder or VCR.
Press ●REC when you reach the scene you
want to start recording.
• The Recorder starts recording.
6
Press REC PAUSE when you want to pause
recording.
7
Press REC STOP when you want to stop
(end) recording.
• Press REC PAUSE again to cancel Pause mode.
Example:
To record by connecting a camcorder to the LINE IN 3
jacks.
The Recorder
To S-VIDEO
Input jack
S-video cable
(commercially
available)
To S-video
output jack
To VIDEO/AUDIO
Input jacks
Video/audio cable
(provided with camcorder or
commercially available)
To video/audio
output jack
Camcorder
97
Function Setting
Settings of This Recorder
This section explains various settings relating to recording and playback which can be used to get more out of the Recorder.
• For details about each setting, see the corresponding pages.
REC. FUNCTION s page 98
VIEW/PLAY SETTING s page 100
ADJUSTMENT s page 102
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE s page 106
REC. FUNCTION
AUTO CHAPTER
• This sets the interval of automatic chapter setting during recording.
• Chapter marks set on a DVD-R/RW in Video mode cannot be combined by editing, so
select an appropriate interval.
10 (10 min interval)
15 (15 min interval)
30 (30 min interval)
- - (off)
EXACT RECORDING
• This function works when timer recording (Easy Recording Guide/VCR Plus+/Timer
Program) onto DVD-R/RW. If disc capacity runs low, and the program cannot be
recorded to the end, this function will automatically change the recording mode so the
program will fit.
(The recording mode set in above situation will have lower picture quality than the
originally set recording mode.)
• If there is very little disc capacity left on the disc, the program may not fit even if Exact
Recording is set.
• When recording in EP or MN1 mode, there is no lower recording mode, so Exact
Recording will not work.
YES
NO
REC. AUDIO FORMAT
• PCM: If you record by setting the recording mode to “FINE” or “MN32”, you can record
audio as PCM (uncompressed) audio which can be played back with 2ch audio
equipment.
* This will not work when recording with the recording mode set to anything other than
“FINE” or “MN32”.
* Recording is done with a recording mode whose image quality is slightly lower than
FINE mode recorded with the “DD 2CH” setting.
• DD 2CH: Records audio as Dolby Digital 2ch audio.
PCM
DD 2CH
EXTERNAL AUDIO
• This selects audio to be input from an external equipment.
STEREO: Recording standard stereo sound.
DUAL MONO: Recording the sound that each channel carries as a separate sound.
STEREO
DUAL MONO
DUAL MONO REC. SET
• This lets you select whether to record the left or right audio channel when recording an
external source onto DVD-R/RW in Video mode.
* This does not apply when recording from the DV IN terminal.
L CH
R CH
MANUAL REC. MODE
• If you set by selecting one of the 32 picture quality levels for “MN”, recording will be
done at that picture quality when “MN” is selected using REC MODE on the remote
control. For details, see page 42.
32 levels
SAP SETTING
• If you set this to “ON” while receiving a SAP (Separate Audio Program) broadcast, you
can listen to and record the SAP audio. For details on ON/OFF setting, the audio you
can listen to, and the audio you can record, see “About SAP” on page 99.
98
ON
OFF
Function Setting
Basic Operation for
REC FUNCTION Setting
This operation is available in both HDD mode
and DVD mode.
Example: Setting “EXTERNAL AUDIO” under
“REC. FUNCTION”
1
1 Press START MENU to
display START MENU screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU[OTHER SETTINGS]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT/
ERASE
DUBBING
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
REC LIST
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
INFORMATION
2
Press \ / | to select “REC.
FUNCTION”.
OTHER SETTINGS[REC. FUNCTION]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
Press ' / " to select “EXTERNAL
AUDIO”, then press SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[REC. FUNCTION]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 THU 10 : 28 PM
ADJUSTMENT
AUTO CHAPTER
EXACT RECORDING
REC. AUDIO FORMAT
EXTERNAL AUDIO
DUAL MONO REC. SET
MANUAL REC. MODE
SAP SETTING
4
This Recorder can record stereo or SAP
(Separate Audio Program) broadcasts, where
available. If the broadcast is in stereo, the
Recorder automatically records the stereo
sound. If the broadcast is in SAP, you can
record both the MAIN and the SAP sounds. If
the broadcast is in stereo/SAP, you can
record either the SAP sound by setting the
SAP mode to “ON”, or stereo sound by
setting the SAP mode to “OFF”.
SAP Broadcast
The monitor output listed in the table shows
the audio output mode. The contents of audio
recording are different between VR mode and
Video mode. See the table below for details.
Broadcast
Received/SAP AUDIO Recording
Mode
ON or OFF
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
R
STEREO+SAP
SAP OFF
STEREO+SAP
SAP ON
L+R
L
L+R
SAP
L+R
L
L+R
L
MONO
MONO
MONO
SAP
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
STEREO
SAP OFF
STEREO
SAP ON
MONO+SAP
SAP OFF
MONO+SAP
SAP ON
AUTO CHAPTER
EXACT RECORDING
REC. AUDIO FORMAT
EXTERNAL AUDIO
DUAL MONO REC. SET
MANUAL REC. MODE
SAP SETTING
3
About SAP
Press \ / | to select the option
you want to set, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[EXTERNAL AUDIO]
MONO
SAP OFF
MONO
SAP ON
MONO
LR
MAIN
SAP
MONO
LR
MONO
LR
MONO
LR
MAIN
SAP
MONO
LR
MONO
LR
L+R
L
L+R
L+R
L+R
L
L+R
L
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
L+R
R
L+R
SAP
L+R
R
L+R
R
MONO
MONO
MONO
SAP
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
L+R
R
L+R
SAP
L+R
R
L+R
R
MONO
MONO
MONO
SAP
MONO
MONO
MONO
MONO
: When recording to a DVD-R/RW disc in Video mode,
the SAP channel is recorded on this channel.
When recording audio in the PCM format with the
recording mode set to “FINE” or “MN32”, audio is
recorded in the same format as recorded to DVDR/RW disc in Video mode.
• When a disc recorded in monaural audio is
played back, monaural audio is played
back even though “STEREO” is displayed
on the screen.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SELECT EXTERNAL AUDIO MODE WHEN
RECORDING.FROM EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT.
STEREO
SELECT
5
DUAL MONO
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
Press EXIT to exit from External
Audio Setting.
99
Function Setting
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
PASSWORD
SETTING
DVD PLAY
SETTING
PASSWORD
•This sets the password for setting or changing Parental Control.
4 digit number
PARENTAL CONTROL
•This lets you set Parental Control depending on disc content.
•Level 1: For most restricted viewing → Level 8: For adult viewing
(The smaller the number, the greater the level of restriction.)
•When “PARENTAL CONTROL” is set to “OFF”, DVD discs can be
played back regardless of the parental level.
The parental level for USA is as follows.
Level 7: NC-17
Level 6: R Level 4: PG13
Level 3: PG
Level 1: G
The parental level set up for Canada is prepared for future use. As for
the set up of an appropriate level, please check the level when you
purchase your DVD disc equipped with the parental control feature.
•Parental Control cannot be set if a password has not been set.
DISC LANGUAGE
•This lets you select the language for subtitle, audio and menu
displayed on the screen.
OFF, LEVEL 1-8
COUNTRY CODE
* Refer to the Country
Code List below.
SUBTITLE
AUDIO
MENU
* Refer to the
Language Code
List below.
Country Code List
USA
CANADA
JAPAN
GERMANY
FRANCE
UK
ITALY
SPAIN
SWISS
SWEDEN
HOLLAND
NORWAY
DENMARK
FINLAND
BELGIUM
HONG KONG
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
MALAYSIA
INDONESIA
TAIWAN
PHILIPPINE
AUSTRALIA
RUSSIA
CHINA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZH
ZU
Language Code List
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DE
DZ
EL
EN
EO
ES
ET
100
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
German
Bhutani
Greek
English
Esperanto
Spanish
Estonian
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
FR
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IT
IW
JA
JI
JW
KA
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
French
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Italian
Hebrew
Japanese
Yiddish
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
Afan (Oromo)
Oriya
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Romanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswat
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapü
k
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Chinese
Zulu
Function Setting
Basic Operation for
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
This operation is available in both HDD mode
and DVD mode.
Example: Setting “DVD PLAY SETTING”
under “VIEW/PLAY SETTING”
1
1 Press START MENU to
display START MENU screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU[OTHER SETTINGS]
DUBBING
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
INFORMATION
2
Press \ / | to select “VIEW/PLAY
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[VIEW/PLAY SETTING]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
PASSWORD SETTING
DVD PLAY SETTING
3
1 Select “PASSWORD SETTING” in
step 3, then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select “YES”, then
press SET/ENTER.
3 Press Number buttons to input 4
digit password, then press SET/
ENTER.
4 Press Number buttons to input
password for confirmation, then
press SET/ENTER.
5 Press SET/ENTER at the “OK”
screen.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
EDIT/
ERASE
REC LIST
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
Password Setting
Press ' / " to select “DVD PLAY
SETTING”, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[VIEW/PLAY SETTING]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE
If you forget your password
•If you forget your password, and you wish
to return the password to its initial state,
press ■STOP/LIVE 4 times in a row at the
Password Setting screen.
Disc Language Setting
•You can set subtitle language, audio
language and menu language.
1 Select “DISC LANGUAGE” in step 4,
then press SET/ENTER.
2 Press \ / | to select subtitle
language, then press SET/ENTER.
3 Press \ / | to select audio language, then press SET/ENTER.
4 Press \ / | to select menu language, then press SET/ENTER.
PASSWORD SETTING
DVD PLAY SETTING
4
Press ' / " to select “PARENTAL CONTROL”, then press
SET/ENTER.
•The password input screen appears.
It changes to the following screen
after you input your password and
press SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[DVD PLAY SETTING]
PARENTAL CONTROL
DISC LANGUAGE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SETS THE PARENTAL CONTROL OF DVD VIDEO
SET THE PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL
OFF
SET THE COUNTRY CODE
USA
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
5
Press \ / | to select the desired
parental control level, then press
SET/ENTER.
6
Press \ / | to select the country
code, then press SET/ENTER.
7
Press EXIT to exit from Parental
Control Setting screen.
101
Function Setting
ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK
SETTING
VIDEO/
AUDIO SETTING
AUTO SETTING/MANUAL SETTING
•Before timer programming, check that the clock is set correctly, and
set it correctly if it is not. If the clock is not set correctly, you cannot
perform setting for features like VCR Plus+ programming.
•Setting methods are slightly different from basic operation. See page
30.
AUTO SETTING
AUTO
MANUAL
TIME ZONE
MANUAL SETTIING
TIME: XX:XX
DATE: Month/Day
YEAR: XXXX
DST: ON/OFF
TV MODE
WIDE 16:9
•If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a new one) and
the screen size of the connected TV changes, you will have to change NORMAL 4:3
LETTER BOX
the “TV MODE” setting.
PAN SCAN
•You can set the screen aspect ratio of the connected TV, and adjust
video output.
•Select “TV MODE” from “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”.
WIDE 16:9:
Select this when connecting with a TV with a 16:9
screen aspect ratio.
NORMAL 4:3: Select this when connecting with a TV with a 4:3 screen
aspect ratio.
LETTER BOX: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect ratio is
4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video, the video will
be played back with black bands at the top and bottom,
while maintaining the 16:9 ratio.
PAN SCAN: If you connect with a TV whose screen aspect ratio is
4:3 and playback a DVD with 16:9 video, the video will
be played back with the left and right sides of the image
cut off to display in 4:3 screen aspect ratio.
(This function works if the disc is labeled for 4:3PS.)
CONNECTING TERMINAL
•If you switch your TV (i.e. because you have bought a new one) and
you change the TV terminal to which you connect, you will have to
change the “CONNECTING TERMINAL” setting.
•For details on connection with a TV, and connecting terminals, please
see pages 22 to 25.
•“PROGRESSIVE OUT” can be set when you have selected “COMPONENT”.
VIDEO/S-VIDEO
COMPONENT
PROGRESSIVE OUT
•If you connect with the component terminal of a progressive compatible TV, playback of DVD video will be cleaner, with less flicker.
•If you connect with a TV which is not progressive compatible, select
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF”.
* If you connect with a TV which is not progressive compatible and set
to “PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON”, video playback from the DVD will not
be output to the TV.
PROGRESSIVE
SCAN ON
PROGRESSIVE
SCAN OFF
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
•You can set this to enjoy Dolby Digital Surround when connecting with
digital input compatible device using digital cable.
PCM:
This setting is for when you digitally connect with 2ch
audio device or an MD recorder. This changes Dolby
Digital audio to PCM (uncompressed) output which can
be played back with 2ch audio device.
Dolby Digital: This setting is for when you digitally connect with audio
device which is compatible with Dolby Digital (5.1ch).
You can also enjoy DTS audio if you connect with an
amplifier or other component which is compatible with
DTS digital surround.
102
PCM
Dolby Digital
Function Setting
ADJUSTMENT
VIDEO/
AUDIO SETTING
DD OUTPUT LEVEL
•This lets you adjust the range between the loudest and softest sound
NO
(dynamic range), and play back at the average volume. Use this
YES
when it is hard to hear dialog.
NO:
This outputs recorded audio as is.
YES*:
This raises the average volume when playing back
Dolby Digital audio so that the volume sounds the same as
an audio CD. (If the audio sounds abnormal, set to “NO”.)
* Lower the volume before setting. If you do not do so, the speaker
may emit a loud sound, or excessive input may be applied to the
speaker.
3D Y/C SEPARATION
YES
•This setting enables cleaner viewing and recording of TV broadcasts,
NO
and video from equipment connected to external input jacks (terminals).
YES:
This enables recording with higher picture quality.
(Normally this is set to “YES”.)
NO:
Set this to “NO” if the picture looks abnormal when
receiving a weak broadcast signal, or when the picture is
disturbed because you have connected VCR or game
equipment to the external input terminals of the Recorder.
* This will not work with video input from the DV IN terminal or S-VIDEO
jack (terminal).
DNR (DIGITAL NOISE REDUCTION)
•This lets you reduce noise for an easier to view picture when noise in
the played back image is bothering you. It is recommended to set this
to “ON” when playing back video recorded in long play modes like LP
mode or EP mode, and to “OFF” when playing back discs with little
noise (like DVD video).
CHANNEL
PRESET
ON
OFF
SELECT RECEPTION TYPE FORMAT
AIR
CATV
•This sets the type of TV broadcast received (AIR or CATV).
SELECT CHANNEL PRESET METHOD
•This sets whether to perform channel setting automatically or
manually.
OPTION
SETTING
AUTO
MANUAL
HI SP DUB PRIORITY
•To perform high speed dubbing from the HDD to a DVD in Video
mode, set this to “YES” before recording to the HDD.
•If you wish to edit in frame units, set this to “NO”. For details of “HIGH
SPEED DUBBING PRIORITY”, refer to page 58.
YES
NO
SEAMLESS PLAYBACK
•This setting is for smoother playback of the transitions between
scenes when you have edited an original title or play list. (The
transition point may shift about one second.)
YES
NO
Continued on Next Page |||
103
Function Setting
ADJUSTMENT
OPTION
SETTING
ALTERNATE RECORDING
•This function is for switching recording to HDD when you originally set
to record to DVD-R/RW but could not because of the disc situation.
This function works in the following cases.
* 1 When there is not enough disc capacity left in DVD.
2 When a disc which cannot record is loaded.
3 When you forget to load a disc.
4 When a disc is playing within 2 minutes prior to the start of timer
recording.
* In case 1, when the remaining capacity of HDD is less than
that of DVD, the recording will continue on to DVD.
YES
NO
LCD BACKLIGHT REC.
•This sets whether to turn the LCD backlight on or off during timer
recording.
NO:
This sets so that the LCD backlight remains lit, even during timer
recording.
YES:
This lets you turn off the LCD backlight only when the power is off
(standby state) and timer recording starts. It is convenient to set this,
for example, when the light disturbs your sleep.
NO
YES
AUTO POWER OFF
•This sets the Recorder so that power is automatically shut off if it is in
stopped state for about 3 hours.
YES
NO
BLUE SCREEN
•This lets you set so that noise on the TV screen is automatically
switched to a blue screen if you select a channel broadcast of which
is finished, or a channel with no broadcast.
OFF
ON
DV SETTING
•This lets you operate the connected digital camcorder from the
Recorder when capturing video into the Recorder via a DV connection. You can also select the type of audio to be captured from the
camcorder.
DV LINK
OFF:
Select this when you cannot operate the camcorder properly with
the On-screen Control Panel.
ON:
This lets you operate the camcorder using the On-screen Control
Panel.
DV AUDIO INPUT
STEREO 1*:
This lets you capture audio you recorded with the camcorder.
STEREO 2*:
This lets you capture camcorder’s audio you recorded using after
recording.
STEREO 1 + STEREO 2*:
This lets you simultaneously capture audio from stereo 1 and audio
from stereo 2.
* When the connected digital camcorder’s audio output is set to 16
bit, this setting will be invalid.
DV LINK
OFF
ON
DV AUDIO INPUT
STEREO 1
STEREO 2
STEREO 1
+ STEREO 2
DVD DISC PROTECTION
•This protects the disc so you do not mistakenly record on it or erase
its content.
104
NOT PROTECT
PROTECT
Function Setting
Basic Operation for
ADJUSTMENT Setting
Example: Setting “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING”
under “ADJUSTMENT”
1
1 Press START MENU to
display START MENU screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“OTHER SETTINGS”, then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU[OTHER SETTINGS]
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
REC LIST
EDIT/
ERASE
DUBBING
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
DISPLAYS SET ITEMS BEFORE REC/PLAYBACK
INFORMATION
2
Press \ / | to select “ADJUSTMENT”.
OTHER SETTINGS[ADJUSTMENT]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK SETTING
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
CHANNEL PRESET
OPTION SETTING
3
Press ' / " to select the setting
you want to set, then press SET/
ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[ADJUSTMENT]
REC. FUNCTION
VIEW/PLAY SETTING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ADJUSTMENT
CLOCK SETTING
VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING
CHANNEL PRESET
OPTION SETTING
4
1 Press ' / " to select the item
you want to select, then press
SET/ENTER.
OTHER SETTINGS[VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING]
TV MODE
CONNECTING TERMINAL
PROGRESSIVE OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DD OUTPUT LEVEL
3D Y/C SEPARATION
DNR
YOU CAN ENJOY CLEAR IMAGES
WHEN PROGRESSIVE TV IS PLAYED
BACK VIA COMPONENT TERMINAL
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
ON
SELECT
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
SETS PROGRESSIVE SCAN OUTPUT
ENTER
ENTER
PROGRESSIVE SCAN
OFF
n
RETURN
2 Press \ / | to select the desired option, then press SET/
ENTER.
5
Press EXIT to exit.
105
Function Setting
Initialization
Finalization
Before recording to DVD-RW, initialize the disc in VR mode
or Video mode.
You can also initialize the HDD. Initialize the HDD only after
dubbing important recordings onto DVD-R/RW disc(s).
Finalization is done so that a recorded DVD-R/RW disc can
be played back with other recorders.
INITIALIZE
INITIALIZE
DVD VR MODE INIT.
•When recording with a DVD-RW in VR mode, initialize in VR mode
before you start recording.
(When you initialize, all of the recorded content of the disc is erased.
Before initializing, check the content of the disc so that you do not
erase any content you need.)
•You cannot initialize if “DVD DISC PROTECTION” is set to
“PROTECT”. (page 104)
YES
NO
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.
•When recording with a DVD-RW disc in Video mode, initialize in Video
mode before you start recording.
(When you initialize, all of the recorded content of the disc is erased.
Before initializing, check the content of the disc so that you do not
erase any content you need.)
•You cannot erase with DVD-R disc.
YES
NO
AUTO INITIALIZE
•This sets the Recorder so it automatically initializes any unused DVDRW discs which are loaded into the Recorder.
You can initialize in either VR mode or Video mode.
VR
VIDEO
HDD INITIALIZE
•If an HDD error message is displayed, or if you wish to return the HDD
to the state it was in when the Recorder was purchased, initialize the
HDD. All recorded video will be erased. (If you use the “ERASE ALL
TITLES” function to erase the titles, protected titles will remain, but if
you use the HDD initializing function, all titles will be erased.)
Dub any important recordings to DVD-R/RW disc(s) before initializing
the HDD.
YES
NO
FINALIZE
DVD
FINALIZE
DVD FINALIZE
•Set this when you want to playback a VR mode or Video mode disc
using another recorder capable of playback.
If you finalize a recording on DVD-R disc, you will not be able to
record any more on the disc.
•Finalization can take anywhere from a few minutes to one hour.
During finalization, all types of operation are disabled (including
turning off power and removing the disc).
•Do not unplug the power cord during finalization. Doing so may make
the disc unusable.
YES
NO
UNDO DVD FINALIZE
•This resets a finalized DVD-RW disc so you can record on it again.
106
YES
NO
Function Setting
Basic Operation for
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE
4
• Initializing (or finalizing) will be
executed.
Example: Setting “DVD VR MODE INIT.” (VR
mode)
1
INITIALIZE
DVD VR MODE INIT.
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.
AUTO INITIALIZE
HDD INITIALIZE
1 Press START MENU to
display START MENU screen.
2 Press ' / " / \ / | to select
“INITIALIZE/FINALIZE”, then
press SET/ENTER.
START MENU[INITIALIZE/FINALIZE]
1 Press \ / | to select “YES”,
then press SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
INITIALIZING
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
REC LIST
EDIT/
ERASE
DUBBING
TIMER
PROGRAM/
CHECK
INITIALIZE/
FINALIZE
OTHER
SETTINGS
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
INITIALIZE
DVD VR MODE INIT.
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.
AUTO INITIALIZE
HDD INITIALIZE
INITIALIZES HDD/DVD AND FINALIZES DVD
INITIALIZING COMPLETED
INFORMATION
2
Press ' / " to select “INITIALIZE” or “FINALIZE”, then press
SET/ENTER.
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
INITIALIZE/FINALIZE
INITIALIZE
DVD FINALIZE
SELECT
3
ENABLES PLAYBACK OF RECORDED
DVD DISC ON OTHER DVD PLAYERS.
ENTER
ENTER
n
RETURN
INITIALIZE
12 / 25 SAT 10 : 28 AM
ENTER
• Initializing (or finalizing) will be
completed.
2 Press SET/ENTER.
REVERTS DISC TO UNUSED STATE
(ALL STORED DATA ERASED).
Press ' / " to select “DVD VR
MODE INIT.”, then press SET/
ENTER.
DVD VR MODE INIT.
DVD VIDEO MODE INIT.
AUTO INITIALIZE
HDD INITIALIZE
OK
ENTER
• Screen in step 2 appears.
5
Press EXIT to exit from INITIALIZE/FINALIZE screen.
NOTE
• Finalization processing will take anywhere
from a few minutes to about an hour.
(Processing will take time if there is a lot of
empty space or if there are many titles on
the DVD disc.)
AFTER RECORDING, IT IS POSSIBLE TO
USE A VARIETY OF EDITING FUNCTIONS
TO CUSTOMIZE YOUR VIDEO.
INITIALIZE DVD?
YES
SELECT
ENTER
ENTER
NO
n
RETURN
107
Troubleshooting
The following problems do not always suggest a defect or malfunction of this Recorder.
Perform the checks listed below before calling service.
Problem
Suggested Solution
The Recorder power does not turn on.
• Is the power cord firmly plugged into the AC outlet?
• If the power cord is plugged into the outlet, unplug it once, wait about one minute, and then plug it in again.
Then turn power on.
The Recorder sounds like it is operating, even when power is
turned off.
• This is the sound the Recorder makes during operation like timer recording.
The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray.
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
Take out the disc and clean it.
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.
Make sure that the disc is playable.
No picture.
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly.
Make sure that the connected TV or the AV amplifier is set to the correct input.
Take out the disc and clean it.
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.
If you set to “PROGRESSIVE SCAN ON”, non-broadcast video signals will not be output from terminals other
than COMPONENT Output jacks.(Page 102)
The Recorder does not play a disc.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Take out the disc and clean it.
Make sure that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
Make sure that region number on the disc match the region number in this Recorder.
Remove the dew in the Recorder.
Check that the disc is recorded in NTSC format.
The Recorder cannot playback video which was not recorded normally.
Proper playback may be impossible due to the state of the disc recording, a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the
state of the pick-up, or compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.
Settings have disappeared.
• If, while its power is on, the Recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) for more than about 1 hour, the
settings will be lost. Make sure that you turn off the Recorder before unplugging the power cord.
Screen freezes and operation buttons do not work.
• Press ■STOP/LIVE and restart playback.
• Turn off the power and turn on the power again.
• If power does not go off, press the RESET button inside the front door of the Recorder.(Page 110)
The remote control does not work.
•
•
•
•
No sound or sound is distorted.
• If the volume of TV or amplifier is set to minimum, turn the volume up.
• There is no sound during still mode, slow motion playback, fast forward and fast reverse.
• DVD audio recorded in DTS is only output from the DIGITAL AUDIO Output terminals. Connect a DTScompatible digital amplifier or decoder to the DIGITAL AUDIO Output OPTICAL or COAXIAL terminal on this
Recorder.
• Check that the audio cable is connected correctly.
• Check that the cable plugs are clean.
• Take out the disc and clean it.
• Audio may not be output depending on the audio recording status, such as when audio other than an audio
signal or non-standard audio is recorded for the audio content of the disc.
The picture from external input is distorted.
• If the signal is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this Recorder. Connect the external equipment directly
to your TV.
The screen is stretched vertically or
horizontally.
• Set the TV mode according to the TV you are connecting.(Page 102)
• If the above operation does not set the TV mode, set it using the functions of the connected TV.
A disc recorded using this Recorder cannot be played back
on another DVD player.
• Check that the disc is finalized when the disc is in video mode.
• Some players will not play even a finalized disc.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, it can only be played back with an RW compatible player. (In some
cases, the disc must be finalized.)
108
Is the Tamper Proof function active?(Page 38)
Set the remote control and the Recorder to the same remote control code.(Page 21)
Use the remote control within its operating range.
Replace the batteries.
Troubleshooting
Problem
Suggested Solution
The playback screen will be disturbed if DVD video is recorded • This Recorder is compatible with the copy guard of analog copy protect system. Some discs contain a copy
to a VCR, or played back through a VCR.
prohibiting signal. If you try to playback such a disc through a VCR, or record to a VCR and playback, copy
guard will prevent normal playback.
TV operates incorrectly.
• Some TVs with wireless remote control capability may operate incorrectly when using the remote control of
this Recorder. Use such TV away from this Recorder.
Recording stops.
• Recording may stop temporarily at parts where recording is impossible (due to scratches or disc fouling,
etc.). When recording starts again, the starting part will be recorded as another title. If the disc is in a
condition where recording is impossible, it is ejected.
• When the recording is interrupted, you might lose a few minutes of the recorded content immediately before
the interrupted point.
You recorded, but nothing was recorded on disc.
• If you record a channel with no broadcast (i.e. where the broadcast has ended), recording will be done with
no video. Likewise, if you record a channel with poor reception, recording may be done with no video.
• Clean the disc.
Cannot record, or recording stops while in progress.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check whether there is enough empty space on the disc being recorded to.
Check whether the disc is protected.
Check whether the number of original titles is 199 (for the HDD) or 99 (for a DVD-R/RW).
Check whether you are trying to record video whose recording is prohibited.
Check whether there was a power failure while waiting for (or during) timer recording.
Clean the disc.
Proper playback may be impossible due to a scratched, warped or dirty disc, the state of the pick-up, or
compatibility issues between this Recorder and the disc being used.
When a digital camcorder is connected to the DV IN terminal,
video from the camcorder does not appear, or there is no
sound, or the system operates incorrectly.
•
•
•
•
•
Check connections.
Turn off the power of both the Recorder and camcorder once, and then turn it on again.
Reconnect DV cable.
Try setting “DV LINK” to “OFF” using “DV SETTING” screen.(Page 104)
Switch input audio using “DV SETTING” screen.(Page 104)
Cannot operate the digital camcorder connected to the DV IN • Set “DV LINK” to “ON” using “DV SETTING” screen. You can operate using the On-screen Control Panel.
terminal.
• Operation may be impossible, depending on the connected camcorder.
Video is disturbed (looks abnormal) during external input or
when receiving a broadcast with poor reception.
• Use with “3D Y/C SEPARATION” set to “NO”.(Page 103)
Erase and edit are impossible.
• When the timer dubbing is on standby, you cannot edit the content being dubbed.
There is no video and no audio.
•
•
•
•
There is just audio with no video.
• Is the connection cable for video output connected properly?
Horizontally wide video appears vertically tall, or black bands
appear at the top and bottom of the screen.
• Is “TV MODE” set to match the connected TV.(Page 102)
• If you are using a wide TV, is the TV mode set to “WIDE 16:9”(Page 102)
Square noise (mosaic) appears on the screen.
• Pictures in blocks may be conspicuous in scenes with rapid movement due to the characteristics of digital
image compression technology.
Video stops.
• Has the Recorder been subjected to shock or impact? Are you using it at an unstable location? The Recorder
will stop if it senses shock or vibration.
• The picture may be disturbed in very rare cases due to the characteristics of the HDD. This is not a
malfunction.
Is the power cord unplugged from the AC outlet?
Is power in the “OFF” state?
Does the broadcast have no video or audio?
Has the Recorder been switched to external input?
Left and right channels of audio are reversed, or sound comes • Are left and right audio cables connected to the opposite terminal, or is one side disconnected?
out of only one side.
If the message SET PROGRESSIVE SCAN TO “OFF” appears
during Other Settings.
• Correctly set “CONNECTING TERMINAL” at “VIDEO/AUDIO SETTING” in “ADJUSTMENT”.(Page 102)
DVD disc does not play back automatically.
• Has HDD been selected instead of DVD? Playback will start automatically by switching to DVD.
• Have you set a DVD video disc that has an automatic playback function?
Continued on Next Page |||
109
Troubleshooting
Problem
Suggested Solution
Timer recording was set, but not executed.
•
•
•
•
Was there a power failure while standing by for timer recording?
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.
Were you performing dubbing?
If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Set and
leave power “ON” for a while before timer recording is performed.
• Is the power cord unplugged from the AC outlet?
The timer recorded content stops in the middle of recording.
•
•
•
•
•
A timer recorded program is erased.
• The recorded program will be overwritten automatically in “Overwritten Program” setting under “Favorite
Program”.
The REC LIST (THUMBNAIL or TITLE LIST) is not displayed.
• The REC LIST cannot be displayed during Time Shift Viewing or Chasing Playback. Press the ■STOP/
LIVE button, and return to live viewing.
• If you use the Recorder at a location with low temperature, the HDD may enter the preparation state. Please
wait a while.
• There may be a problem with the HDD. Contact the nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center.
Was the power plug unplugged, or was there a power failure, during timer recording?
Is the HDD or DVD full? Erase unnecessary titles from the list.
Recording will stop if a program whose recording is forbidden begins in the middle of recording.
Clean the disc.
If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to DVD-R/RW, recording will stop in the
middle. If there is a power failure or other power problem during recording to HDD, that program will be lost.
When a CD is recorded to MD using digital connection, the CD • If the interval between CD tracks is short, the track numbers on the recorded MD may differ from the CD.
and MD do not have the same track numbers.
The Recorder makes a sound even when there is no operation. • If you do not operate the Recorder for a certain time while power is ON, you will hear the sound of the HDD
operating. This is not a malfunction.
The Recorder heats up during use.
• When using this Recorder, the console cabinet may heat up, depending on the use environment. This is not a
malfunction.
The Recorder makes a snapping sound when starting
recording or playback.
• The Recorder may sometimes make a snapping sound when starting recording or playback if you have not
operated it for a while. This is the sound of the Recorder operating, and is not a malfunction.
A blinking “----” appears on the front display panel.
• The clock has not been set. Set the clock.
NOTE
• If this Recorder receives strong interference from strong external noise such as excessive static electricity, malfunction of
power supply voltage caused by lightning during Recorder use or a wrong operation is sent to the Recorder, errors like the
Recorder not accepting an operation may occur.
• Press RESET with a toothpick or other narrow rod-like object (nonmetal) when the Recorder does not operate properly
even after the power has been turned off and then back on again.
• Since the clock, channel, timer recording programs and other data in memory are also reset when RESET has been
pressed, they must be set again.
• EZ Set Up function starts automatically when RESET is pressed.
• When the problem persists even after pressing RESET, unplug the power
cord and plug it again. If this does not solve the problem, contact the
RESET button
nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center.
Service Information (For the U.S.)
For the location of the nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center, or to obtain product literature, accessories, supplies or
customer assistance, please call 1-800-BE-SHARP (1-800-237-4277) or visit SHARP’s website (http://www.sharpusa.com).
1. Do not attempt to service this product yourself. Instead, unplug it and contact a qualified service technician.
(See CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY at the end of this manual.)
2. Be sure the service technician uses authorized replacement parts or their equivalents. Unauthorized parts may cause fire,
electrical shock, or other hazards.
3. Following any service or repair, be sure the service technician performs safety checks to certify that this product is in safe
operating order.
110
On-screen Error Messages
Messages Relating to DVD Discs and the HDD
• The following messages appear on the TV screen in case the disc you tried to playback is not appropriate or
the operation is not correct.
Error message
CANNOT PLAY BACK THIS DISC.
THIS IS A NON-STANDARD DISC.
REGION CODE OF DISC IS WRONG.
DISC IS NOT INSERTED.
CANNOT OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.
DISC IS PROTECTED.
COULD NOT REPAIR THE DISC.
COULD NOT FINALIZE.
THIS VIDEO IS COPY PROTECTED.
RECORDING IS NOT POSSIBLE.
CANNOT RECORD MORE.
CANNOT RECORD ON THIS DISC.
NO TAPE INSERTED IN DV
CAMCORDER.
CONNECTING TO DV CAMCORDER.
COULD NOT INITIALIZE.
DISC IS FULL.
CANNOT RECORD OR STORE.
THIS VIDEO CANNOT BE RECORDED
TO THIS DISC.
CAN’T DETECT CAMCORDER.
SET THE DATE AND TIME.
Possible Error
• The disc cannot be played back with
this Recorder.
• If you load a disc which cannot be
played with this Recorder (i.e. a
scratched disc), or if you load a disc
upside down, this message will
appear, and the disc tray will
automatically pop out.
• Occurs if you load a DVD disc whose
region number is not “ALL” or whose
region number does not contain “1”.
• Occurs if no disc is loaded in the disc
tray.
• Occurs if operation is incorrect.
• Occurs if you attempt to record or edit
a disc for which disc protection is set.
• Occurs if you attempt DV input of
video which cannot be recorded, and
attempt to record to a DVD.
• If there is a power failure during DVD
recording, the system automatically
tries to recover data after power is
restored. This error occurs if such
recovery is impossible.
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or
dirty, etc.
• Occurs if video with a copy guard
signal is input.
• Occurs if a title or chapter mark
exceeds the recordable upper limit.
• Number of titles: HDD 199/DVD 99.
Number of chapters: HDD 999/
DVD 999
• Occurs if you load a disc which cannot
be recorded to with this Recorder, or a
disc which is scratched or dirty.
• Occurs if you attempt operation when a
tape has not been loaded in the digital
camcorder linked via DV connection.
• Occurs if the digital camcorder power
goes off or the cable is pulled out
while connecting to DV.
• Occurs if connection with the digital
camcorder is broken.
• Occurs if the disc is scratched or
dirty, etc.
• Occurs if there is no empty space in
the disc.
• Occurs if you try to record a “Copy
Once” broadcast onto a disc which is
not compatible with CPRM.
• Occurs if you set to DV input without
connecting a digital camcorder.
• Occurs if multiple digital camcorders
are connected.
• Occurs if timer programming is done
when the Recorder clock has not
been set.
Suggested Solution
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.
• Cancel disc protection, or reload a
recordable disc.
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.
• Cannot record.
• Erase unnecessary titles.
• Either erase unnecessary chapters, or
combine chapters.
• Reload an appropriate recording
disc.
• Load a tape into the digital
camcorder.
• Check the power of digital camcorder
or cable connection.
• System is performing reconnection
processing. Wait about 30 seconds.
• Check the disc, and load it correctly.
• Load a disc with empty space.
• Erase unnecessary titles.
• Load a CPRM compatible disc (DVDRW Ver. 1.1 or higher) initialized in VR
mode.
• Connect a digital camcorder, and
reset again to DV input.
• Set the clock and perform timer
programming again.
Continued on Next Page |||
111
On-screen Error Messages
Error message
Possible Error
RECORDING WAS STOPPED DUE TO
FULL DISC.
REPAIRING THE DISC.
• Occurs when empty space in the
disc runs out.
• Occurs when recording stops
before disc information has been
correctly written onto a DVD, due to
a problem like a power failure.
• Occurs if the loaded disc cannot be
recorded to or played because it is
a non-standard or scratched, etc.
• Occurs if you try to record “Copy
Once” video onto DVD-R or nonCPRM compatible DVD-RW.
THIS IS A NON-STANDARD DISC.
REMOVE IT.
THIS VIDEO CANNOT BE RECORDED
TO THIS DISC.
TIMER RECORDING COULD NOT
START.
LIVE BROADCAST RECORDING
PROHIBITED.
RECORDING STOPPED.
THIS VIDEO IS COPY PROTECTED.
RECORDING IS NOT POSSIBLE.
CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO HDD
ERROR.
CAN VIEW LIVE BROADCASTS ONLY.
CONTACT THE NEAREST SHARP
AUTHORIZED SERVICER.
SYSTEM ERROR.
POWER IS OFF.
CHECKING HARD DISC.
CAN ONLY VIEW LIVE BROADCAST
UNTIL CONFIRMATION IS OVER.
THIS PROGRAM IS COPY PROTECTED.
CANNOT VIEW TIME SHIFT.
• Occurs if a program begins during
recording, and recording of the
broadcast itself is forbidden due to
copyright protection.
• Occurs if you attempt to record a
program, and recording of the
broadcast itself is forbidden due to
copyright protection.
• Occurs when there is a problem
with the HDD, and when you
perform an operation which
requires HDD operation, like special
playback or recording.
• If a problem occurs with the HDD
while power is “ON”, power is shut
off automatically.
• Occurs if there is a power failure, or
the power cord is unplugged and
plugged in again while power is
“ON”.
• Occurs if time shift viewing is
impossible because recording of
the broadcast itself is forbidden by
copyright protection.
Suggested Solution
• Wait until DVD disc recovery is
finished.
• Remove the disc.
• Record on CPRM compatible DVDRW disc in VR mode.
• Initialize the HDD once. If initialization does not solve the problem,
please contact the nearest Sharp
Authorized Service Center as soon
as possible.
• It may take 1-2 minutes to check the
HDD. During this time, you can only
watch live broadcasts. Wait a while
until the check is over.
• You can only view live broadcasts.
Messages during Special Playback
Error message
Possible Error
CANNOT OPERATE DUE TO THE
CONDITION OF HARD DISC.
• Occurs if you perform operation like
special playback when there is
problem with the HDD.
HARD DISC IS NOT READY YET.
CANNOT OPERATE.
• Occurs if you perform operation
requiring operation of the HDD (like
special playback or recording)
during HDD preparation.
Suggested Solution
• The HDD must be repaired, so
contact the nearest Sharp Authorized Service Center as soon as
possible.
• You can only view live broadcasts
until preparation is finished. Wait a
while until operation is enabled. (If
you use the Recorder at a cold
location and the HDD temperature
is low, HDD preparation may take
some time.)
Messages during Dubbing
Error message
CANNOT SELECT MORE.
112
Possible Error
• Occurs if you attempt to select 6
titles (chapters) at the screen for
selecting titles or chapters to be
dubbed.
Suggested Solution
• Dub 5 titles (or chapters) at a time.
On-screen Error Messages
Messages during Dubbing
Error message
CANNOT HIGH SPEED DUB THIS
TITLE.
TITLE PROTECTION IS SET.
CANCEL TITLE PROTECTION
BEFORE DUBBING.
CANNOT DUB TO DISC DUE TO
COPY PROTECTED PROGRAM.
TIMER PROGRAM EXCEEDS THE
MAX.
CANNOT DUB TO THE DISC.
CANNOT DUB FROM THE DISC.
COPY PROTECTED PROGRAM WILL
BE MOVED.
Possible Error
• Occurs if you attempt high-speed
dubbing onto DVD in Video mode of
a title for which “High Speed
Dubbing Priority” has not been set,
or if you attempt high speed
dubbing of a title edited in frame
units on the HDD.
• Occurs when you attempt to dub a
title containing a “Copy Once” part
for which title protection has been
set.
• Occurs if you attempt to dub a title
containing a “Copy Once” part to
DVD-R or a non-CPRM compatible
DVD-RW.
• Occurs when you attempt to set
timer recording for more than the
maximum number (32) of timer
programs.
• Occurs if an unrecordable disc is
loaded (i.e. when the maximum
number of titles or chapters is
exceeded, when the disc is
protected, when the disc is
scratched or dirty, or when the disc
is a ROM disc).
• Occurs when a disc other than a
DVD-R/RW is loaded.
• Occurs if you attempt to dub a title
containing a “Copy Once” part.
Suggested Solution
• Perform “Rate Conversion Dubbing”.
• If a title contains a “Copy Once”
part, you can only move the
original. If title protection is set for a
title, you cannot move it, so perform
dubbing (movement) after canceling title protection.
• Dub in VR mode to a CPRMcompatible DVD-RW.
• Set the dubbing timer after
canceling the timer recording for
one program.
• Replace with a recordable disc.
• Dub from a DVD-R/RW disc.
• Be careful because the dubbing
source video is erased after
dubbing.
Messages during Editing
Error message
CANNOT SELECT MORE.
CANNOT SET THIS POSITION.
CHAPTER IS FULL. CANNOT
OPERATE THIS FUNCTION.
CANNOT COMBINE THESE CHAPTERS.
Possible Error
• Occurs if you attempt to select
more than 20 titles (chapters) when
you perform Erase Selected Title.
• Occurs if you attempt to designate
a range shorter than 3 seconds and
edit.
• Occurs if the editing result exceeds
the upper limit of total number of
chapters (999).
• Occurs if you attempt to combine
chapters which cannot be combined. (Chapters created when you
erase a scene or chapter in a single
title cannot be erased).
Suggested Solution
• Erase a maximum of 20 titles
(chapters) at a time.
• Designate a range of 3 seconds or
more. (If you designate a range of 3
seconds or more, you can
designate in frame units.)
• Edit after erasing unnecessary
chapter marks by combining
chapters.
Other Message
Error message
TURN OFF PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PLAYBACK.
Possible Error
Suggested Solution
• Occurs if the Recorder is connected with the Video In or S-Video
In jack of a TV, and PROGRESSIVE
OUT is set to “PROGRESSIVE
SCAN ON”.
• Set PROGRESSIVE OUT to
“PROGRESSIVE SCAN OFF”.(Page
102)
• Correctly set “CONNECTING
TERMINAL” at “VIDEO/AUDIO
SETTING” in “ADJUSTMENT”.(Page
102)
113
Glossary
Alternate
Recording
If you set to Exact Recording but the timer recording program will not fit into a single
DVD-R/RW, the Recorder will automatically perform Alternate Recording to HDD.
The Recorder will also perform Alternate Recording to HDD if you forget to load a DVDR/RW.
Angle
Recorded onto some DVD discs are scenes which have been simultaneously shot from
a number of different angles (the same scene is shot from the front, from the left side,
from the right side, etc.). With such discs, you can select the angle on Function Control
Screen to view the scene from different angles.
AV AUTO REC
This function lets you record video from an external equipment in linkage with the timer
programming of that device. This can be done by connecting with a receiver or other
equipment with a timer programming function.
Chapter
Number
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. A title is subdivided into many sections,
each of which is numbered, and specific parts of video presentations can be searched
quickly using these numbers.
Chasing Playback
This function lets you playback and view a program while it is being recorded onto
HDD.
Copy Guard
This function prevents copying. You cannot record software or broadcast programs
marked by the copyright holder with a signal which limits copying.
Digital Gamma
Corrects for gradations in dark areas of images to make images clearer.
Digital Super
Picture
Enhances the fine detail of the image and outlines of the objects it contains.
Disc Menu
This lets you select things like the subtitle language or overdub audio using a menu
stored on the DVD video disc.
Dolby Digital
(5.1 channel)
A sound system developed by Dolby Laboratories Inc. that gives movie theater ambience to audio output when the product is connected to a Dolby Digital 5.1 channel
processor or amplifier.
Dolby Digital
Output Level
Setting that increases the average volume of Dolby Digital audio when playing a DVD.
Dolby Virtual
Surround
This lets you enjoy Surround audio via analog connection with a stereo (2ch) TV or
audio equipment.
DTS
This is a digital sound system developed by Digital Theater Systems for use in cinemas.
This system uses 6 audio channels and provides accurate sound field positioning and
realistic acoustics. (By connecting a DTS Digital Surround decoder, you can also listen
to DTS Digital Surround sound.)
Exact Dubbing
This function is used when dubbing from HDD to DVD. It automatically selects the
recording mode according to the recording time of the title so that the recording will fit
into a single disc.
Exact Recording
This function automatically changes the recording mode to prevent recordings from
running out before they are finished due to a lack of available DVD disc space by
comparing the available disc space and the time required for the timer recording.
EZ Set Up
Tuner channels and clock are automatically set for both Air and CATV channels.
114
Glossary
Finalization
This is done to enable playback of discs (Video mode) recorded with this Recorder
using other DVD-RW and DVD-R compatible DVD players. (We do not guarantee that
playback will be possible with all DVD players.)
The DVD players which can play back VR mode discs are those with an “ ” indication.
High Speed
Dubbing Priority
This function lets you perform high speed dubbing to a DVD even in Video mode after
recording, by setting High Speed Dubbing Priority to “YES” when recording to HDD.
Initialization
This allows you to use the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in this Recorder. If you initialize a
disc, all of the programs recorded on it are erased.
Letter Box
Screen size that cuts off the top and bottom of the image to allow playing of widescreen (16:9) software on a connected 4:3 TV.
4:3
LB
Linear PCM
Sound
Linear PCM is a signal recording format used for Audio CDs.
The sound on Audio CDs is recorded at 44.1 kHz with 16 bits. (On DVD discs, sound is
recorded at between 48 kHz with 16 bits and 96 kHz with 24 bits.)
MP3
One type of audio compression that uses MPEG1. This format compresses sound to
about 1/10, without impairing the original sound quality.
Multi Angle
This is a feature of DVD video discs. In some discs, the same picture is shot from
different angles, and these are stored in a single disc so you can enjoy playback from
different angles. (This function can be enjoyed if the disc is recorded with multiple
angles.)
Multi Audio
This is a feature of DVD video discs. This function makes it possible to record multiple
different audio tracks for the same video, so you can enhance your enjoyment by
switching audio. (You can enjoy this function with discs recorded with multiple audio
tracks.)
Original
A video (title) recorded from a TV broadcast or external input is called an “Original”.
Pan Scan
Screen size that cuts off the sides of the image to allow playing of wide-screen (16:9)
software on a connected 4:3 TV.
4:3
PS
Parental Control
In some digital broadcasts and DVD video discs, a control level for disc viewing is set
depending on the age of the viewer. With this Recorder, you can set the control level for
viewing such broadcasts and discs.
Play List
A set of titles created by copying just the needed scenes from original titles is called a
“Play List”. (The original titles remain as are.)
Playback
Control (PBC)
This information is recorded on video CDs (version 2.0). This allows you to actively
select the sections to be viewed or listened to, using a menu displayed on the TV.
Rate Conversion Dubbing
This function is used to select the picture quality of dubbed titles at the time of dubbing.
REC LIST
This is a list screen which lets you check the recorded programs (titles) in list form. You
can select either Thumbnail or Title List as the REC LIST.
Region
Number
Number identifying a geographic region of compatibility for a DVD.
Continued on Next Page |||
115
Glossary
Remote Control Code
This is the type of the remote control signal for operating the recorder. There are two
types of remote control signal: “Remote Control No. 1” (RC-1) and “Remote Control No.
2” (RC-2).
Resume Playback
If you stop playback while it is in progress, the Recorder stores the stop position in
memory, and this function lets you playback from that stopping point.
Simultaneous
Recording/
Playback
This function lets you play back and view already recorded programs while you are
recording. (However, you cannot play back from a DVD while recording to the DVD.)
Skip
This returns to the start of the chapter (or track) being played, or skips to the next
chapter.(or track)
Subtitles
These are the printed lines appearing at the bottom of the screen which translate or
transcribe the dialog. They are recorded on DVD discs.
Time Number
This indicates the play time which has elapsed from the start of a disc or a title. It can
be used to find a specific scene quickly. (It may not work with some discs.)
Time Shift
This Recorder is designed so you can automatically record the program being viewed
to the HDD by pressing the TIME SHIFT button. The automatically recorded program
can be viewed using other types of playback.
Title Menu
In a DVD video disc, this is the menu for selecting things like the chapter to be played
back and the subtitle language. In some DVD video discs, the title menu may be called
the “Top Menu”.
Title Number
These numbers are recorded on DVD discs. When a disc contains two or more movies,
these movies are numbered as title 1, title 2, etc.
Track Number
These numbers are assigned to the tracks which are recorded on video CDs and Audio
CDs. They enable specific tracks to be located quickly.
VBR Control
VBR is the abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate control. This feature performs control by
varying the bit rate (the amount of code transferred in a fixed period of time) by assigning a larger amount of code to complex video images such as sections containing rapid
movement or sections containing sudden changes in color, and assigning a smaller
amount of code in the opposite cases.
Video Mode
This is a recording format for making DVD R/RW discs playable with other commercially
available DVD players. (We do not guarantee that playback will be possible with all DVD
players.)
VR Mode
This recording format is the basic DVD-RW recording format, and lets you enjoy the
various editing functions available with this Recorder.
116
Specifications
General
HDD capacity: ................................
Power supply: .................................
Power consumption
(Normal): .....................................
Power consumption
(Standby): ...................................
Dimensions: ....................................
Weight: ............................................
Operating temperature ...................
Storage temperature: ......................
Operating humidity: ........................
TV systems: .....................................
80 GB*
AC 120 V, 60 Hz
40 W
0.7 W
Approx. 430 mm × 59 mm × 323
mm (W × H × D)
Approx. 1615/16" × 221/64" × 1223/32"
Approx. 5.0 kg (11.1 lbs)
41°F to 95°F (5°C to 35°C)
–4°F to 131°F (–20°C to 55°C)
10% to 80% (no condensation)
NTSC system, 525 lines, 60
fields
Recording
Recordable disc media: ................. DVD-RW, DVD-R
Recording system (HDD): ............... Video: MPEG
Audio: Dolby Digital (2ch)/Linear
PCM (FINE mode only)
Recording system (DVD-R/RW): ..... Video: DVD-Video Recording
(VR mode)
DVD-VIDEO (Video mode)
Audio: Dolby Digital (2ch)/Linear
PCM (FINE mode only)
Recording time (Hard disc): ........... FINE (High picture quality):
Approx. 20 hours
SP (Standard): Approx. 33 hours
LP (2X): Approx. 67 hours
EP (3X): Approx. 100 hours
MN (Manual): 32 levels between
FINE and EP
(However, the maximum
continuous recording time is 12
hours.)
Recording time
(With 4.7GB DVD-R/RW): ........... FINE (High picture quality):
Approx. 1 hour
SP (Standard): Approx. 2 hours
LP (2X): Approx. 4 hours
EP (3X): Approx. 6 hours
MN (Manual): 32 levels between
FINE and EP
Playback
Playable discs: ................................ DVD Video, DVD-R/RW, Audio
CD (CD-DA), Video CD, CD-R/
RW (CD-DA, Video CD format,
MP3 file format)
Timer
Programs: ....................................... 32 programs/1 year
Clock: .............................................. Quartz lock
(12-hour digital display)
Memory backup: ............................. Approx. 1 hour
Input/Output
VHF/UHF antenna input/
output terminal: ...........................
Video input: .....................................
Input level: ...............................
Jacks: ......................................
Video output:
Output level: ............................
Jacks: ......................................
S-Video input: .................................
Y-Input level: ............................
C-Input level: ...........................
Jacks: ......................................
S-Video output:
Y-Output level: .........................
C-Output level: ........................
Jacks: ......................................
Component video output:
Output level: ............................
Jacks: ......................................
Audio input: .....................................
Input level: ...............................
Jacks: ......................................
Audio output: ..................................
Output level: ............................
75Ω (F-shape connector)
Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front)
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
0.286 Vp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
1 Vp-p (75Ω)
0.286 Vp-p (75Ω)
4 pin mini DIN
Y: 1 Vp-p (75Ω)
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
RCA jack
Input 1, 2 (rear), 3 (front) L/R
2 V rms (Input impedance: more
than 22 kΩ)
RCA jack
L/R
2 V rms (Output impedance:
less than 1.5 kΩ)
RCA jack
Jack: ........................................
Digital audio optical output:
Terminal: .................................. Square Optical terminal
Digital audio coaxial output:
Jack: ........................................ RCA jack
DV input:
Terminal: .................................. 4 pin (i.LINK/IEEE 1394
standard)
LASER Specification
Wave length: ................................... DVD: 658 nm
CD: 784 nm
Laser power: ................................... DVD: 100 mW
CD: 225 mW
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
* When referring to hard disc drive storage capacity, GB stands for
one billion bytes.
Tuner
Channel coverage: ......................... VHF 2-13
UHF 14-69
CATV 1-125
117
Note
ESPAÑOL
(Guía de operación rápida)
MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES .... 121
Guía de operación rápida en español ............. 122
Conexión básica .................................................................
EZ Set Up ...........................................................................
Antes de utilizar la grabadora ............................................
Grabación directa en HDD .................................................
Grabación directa en DVD .................................................
Reproducción HDD ............................................................
Reproducción DVD-RW/R ..................................................
Reproducción de DVD Vídeo .............................................
Reproducción de Audio CD/Vídeo CD ...............................
122
122
123
123
123
124
125
125
125
119
Para futura referencia, anote los números de modelo y de serie
(indicados en la parte posterior este producto) en el espacio provisto.
No. de modelo: DV-HR300U
No. de serie:
AVISO: PARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE INCENDIO O ELECTROCHOQUE
NO EXPONGA ESTE APARATO A LA HUMEDAD.
PRECAUCION
PELIGRO DE DESCARGA
ELECTRICA NO ABRIR
PRECAUCION:
TPARA REDUCIR EL RIESGO DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA, NO
QUITE LA CUBIERTA. EL USUARIO NO DEBERA DAR NINGUN
TIPO DE SERVICIO A NINGUNA PARTE INTERNA. DEBERA SER
REALIZADO SOLO POR PERSONAL DE SERVICIO CALIFICADO.
Este símbolo previene al usuario
del voltaje aislado dentro de la
unidad que puede provocar
descargas eléctricas peligrosas.
Este símbolo advierte al usuario
que existen instrucciones de
operación y de mantenimiento en la
literatura incluida en esta unidad.
“ADVERTENCIA—Las reglas de la FCC (Comisió
n Federal de
Comunicaciones) estipulan que cualquier modificació
n o cambio a este
equipo no aprobado expresamente por el fabricante podráanular la
autorizació
n del usuario para operar este equipo”.
INFORMACION
Este equipo se ha sometido a todo tipo de pruebas y cumple con las normas establecidas para dispositivo
digital de Clase B, de conformidad con la Parte 15 de las reglas de la FCC (Comisión Federal de
Comunicaciones). Estas reglas están diseñadas para asegurar una protección razonable contra
interferencias perjudiciales en las instalaciones residenciales. Este equipo genera, utiliza y puede emitir
energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza debidamente, es decir, conforme a las instrucciones,
podrían producirse interferencias perjudiciales en las radiocomunicaciones. Sin embargo, no se garantiza
que estas interferencias no se produzcan en una instalación determinada. Si este equipo ocasiona
interferencias en la recepción de radio o televisión, lo cual puede comprobarse con sólo apagar y encender
el equipo, intente corregir el problema mediante una o una combinación de las siguientes medidas:
—Reoriente la antena receptora o cámbiela de lugar.
—Aumente la separación entre el equipo y el receptor.
—Enchufe el equipo a una toma de corriente situada en un circuito distinto del receptor.
—Consulte a su distribuidor o a un técnico experto en radio/televisión.
PRECAUCION:
ESTA UNIDAD HA SIDO CLASIFICADA COMO PRODUCTO CLASS 1 LASER.
EL USO DE MANDOS O AJUSTES O LA REALIZACION DE PROCEDIMIENTOS DISTINTOS DE LOS
INDICADOS EN LA PRESENTE IMPLICA EL RIESGO DE EXPOSICION A UNA RADIACION PELIGROSA.
COMO LOS RAYOS LASER UTILIZADOS EN ESTA UNIDAD PUEDEN RESULTAR PERJUDICIALES PARA SUS
OJOS, NO INTENTE DESARMAR EL GABINETE.
SOLICITE EL SERVICIO UNICAMENTE A PERSONAL CUALIFICADO.
Aviso al instalador de sistemas CATV:
Este aviso tiene la finalidad de llamar la atención del instalador de sistemas CATV para que tenga en cuenta
el Artículo 820-40 de NEC, que ofrece instrucciones para realizar una conexión a tierra apropiada y, en
particular, especifica que el cable de puesta a tierra deberá conectarse al sistema de puesta a tierra del
edificio tan cerca del punto de entrada del cable como sea posible.
Como socio de ENERGY STAR®, SHARP ha determinado que este producto cumple con las pautas de ENERGY
STAR® para uso eficiente de energía. ENERGY STAR es una marca registrada estadounidense.
120
MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD IMPORTANTES
PRECAUCIÓN: Lea todas estas instrucciones
14. Puesta a tierra de la antena exterior – Si una antena exterior
o sistema de cables esta conectado al producto, asegúrese de
que la antena o sistema de cables esté puesto a tierra de forma
que proporcione cierta protección contra sobretensiones y
acumulaciones de cargas estáticas. El estatuto 810 del Código
Eléctrico Nacional ANSI/NFPA 70 proporciona información relativa
a la puesta a tierra adecuada del poste y de la estructura de soporte,
puesta a tierra del cable de entrada a una unidad de descarga de
antena, tamaño de los conductores de puesta a tierra, ubicación
de la unidad de descarga de antena, conexión a los electrodos de
puesta a tierra y los requisitos correspondientes al electrodo de
puesta a tierra. Refiérase al diagrama siguiente.
antes de utilizar este producto y guárdelas para
consultarlas posteriormente.
La energía eléctrica permite realizar muchas funciones
útiles. Este producto se ha diseñado y fabricado para
garantizar su seguridad personal. EL USO INADECUADO
PUEDE RESULTAR EN PELIGROS DE DESCARGAS
ELÉCTRICAS O INCENDIOS POTENCIALES. Con el fin
de respetar las medidas de seguridad incorporadas en
este producto, tenga en cuenta las siguientes reglas
básicas de instalación, uso y servicio técnico.
CABLE DE ENTRADA
DE ANTENA
1. Lectura de las instrucciones – Todas las instrucciones de
seguridad y uso deben leerse antes de utilizar el producto.
ABRAZADERA DE PUESTA
A TIERRA
2. Conservación de las instrucciones – Las instrucciones
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
de seguridad y uso deben guardarse para usarlas como
referencia en el futuro.
Advertencias – Deben observarse todas las advertencias del
producto y de las instrucciones de uso.
Instrucciones – Deben seguirse todas las instrucciones de
uso.
Limpieza – Desenchufe este producto de la toma de
alimentación antes de limpiarlo. No utilice limpiadores líquidos ni
aerosoles. Utilice un paño húmedo.
Aditamentos – No utilice aditamentos no recomendados por
el fabricante del producto, ya que pueden causar peligros.
Agua y humedad – No utilice este producto cerca del agua,
por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera, cubeta de lavado, fregadero
de cocina, en un sótano húmedo, ni cerca de una piscina, etc.
Accesorios – No coloque este producto sobre un carrito,
soporte, trípode o mesa inestable. El producto podría caerse,
causando heridas graves a niños o adultos y daños graves al
propio producto. Utilícelo solamente con un carrito, soporte,
trípode o mesa recomendado por el fabricante o vendido con el
producto. Cualquier trabajo de montaje del producto deberá
realizarse según las instrucciones del fabricante, y deberán
utilizarse los accesorios de montaje recomendados por él.
Transporte – Mueva el producto con cuidado
cuando se encuentre en un carrito. Las
paradas bruscas, la fuerza excesiva o las
superficies desniveladas pueden causar que
el producto y el carrito se caigan.
UNIDAD DE DESCARGA
DE ANTENA
(ESTATUTO 810–20 DEL NEC)
EQUIPO DE
SERVICIO
ELÉCTRICO
ABRAZADERAS DE PUESTA A TIERRA
SISTEMA DE ELECTRODO DE
PUESTA A TIERRA DEL SERVICIO
DE ALIMENTACIÓN
(PARTE 250. PARTE H DEL NEC)
NEC- NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (CÓDIGO ELÉCTRICO NACIONAL)
15. Relámpagos – Como protección complementaria para este
16.
17.
18.
10. Ventilación – Las ranuras y aberturas de la caja se proporcionan
para la ventilación del producto, para asegurar un funcionamiento
fiable y para protegerlo contra el sobrecalentamiento, y a la misma
vez, estas aberturas no deben bloquearse ni cubrirse. Con el fin
de que las aberturas no queden bloqueadas, no coloque el
producto sobre una cama, sofá, alfombra u otras superficies
similares. Este producto no debe instalarse en un espacio cerrado,
como un estante para libros, a menos que reciba una ventilación
adecuada o que las instrucciones del fabricante hayan sido
observadas.
11. Fuentes de alimentación – Este producto debe utilizarse
únicamente con el tipo de fuente de alimentación especificada
en la etiqueta de características. Si no está seguro del tipo de
suministro eléctrico existente en su hogar, consulte con el
proveedor de producto o con la compañía eléctrica local. Con
respecto al producto diseñado para utilizarse con pilas, o otras
fuentes de suministro consulte el manual de instrucciones.
12. Puesta a tierra o polarización – Este producto dispone de
un enchufe polarizado de dos cables (una cuchilla del enchufe
es màs grande que la otra) o con un enchufe puesto a tierra de
tres cables (un tercer conector para puesta a tierra). El enchufe
polarizado de dos cables encaja en la toma de alimentación en
una única posición solamente. El enchufe a tierra de tres cables
se conecta solamente en un tomacorriente con descarga a tierra.
Si el enchufe no encaja, solicite a un electricista la sustitución de
la toma de alimentación obsoleta. No modifique el enchufe y
respete esta medida de seguridad.
13. Protección del cable de la alimentación – Los cables de
la alimentación deben instalarse de forma que nadie pueda
caminar sobre ellos ni queden atrapados por artículos colocados
sobre o contra ellos, poniendo mucha atención a las partes donde
los cables entran en contacto con las clavijas, a las tomas de
corriente y a los puntos por donde salen del producto.
CONDUCTORES DE PUESTA
A TIERRA
(ESTATUTO 810–21 DEL NEC)
19.
20.
producto durante tormentas eléctricas o cuando no lo utilice durante
mucho tiempo, desenchúfelo de la toma mural y desconecte la
antena o sistema de cables. De esta forma se evitará que el
producto se dañe debido a relámpagos y sobretensiones.
Lineas eléctricas – Los sistemas de antenas exteriores no
deben encontrarse cerca de líneas eléctricas aéreas o de otros
circuitos de alimentación o de luz eléctrica, ni donde puedan
caer sobre dichos circuitos o líneas. Cuando se instale un sistema
de antena exterior, debe tenerse especial cuidado para evitar
entrar en contacto con tales circuitos o líneas eléctricas, ya que
tal contacto puede ser mortal.
Sobrecarga – No sobrecargue las tomas murales, los cables
prolongadores ni los receptores integrales, ya que si lo hace
pueden producirse incendios o descargas eléctricas.
Introducción de objetos sólidos y líquidos – No
introduzca nunca ningún tipo de objeto en este producto a través
de las ranuras de la caja, ya que pueden entrar en contacto con
puntos de tensión peligrosos o cortocircuitar componentes, lo
que podría provocar incendios o descargas eléctricas. No
derrame nunca ningún tipo de líquido sobre el producto.
Servicio – No intente reparar por sí mismo este producto, ya
que al abrir o extraer las cubiertas puede quedar expuesto a
tensión peligrosa y demás peligros. Solicite asistencia técnica a
personal especializado.
Averías que necesitan ser reparadas – Desenchufe este
producto de la toma mural y solicite asistencia técnica a personal
especializado en las siguientes condiciones:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Cuando el cable de alimentación o el enchufe esté dañado.
Si se ha derramado líquido sobre o caído objetos dentro del producto.
Si el producto ha estado expuesto a la lluvia o al agua.
Si el producto no funciona con normalidad al seguir las instrucciones
del manual. Ajuste solamente los controles especificados en el
manual de instrucciones, ya que el ajuste inadecuado de otros
controles puede provocar daños que a menudo requieren un trabajo
extenso por parte de un técnico especializado para que el producto
recupere su funcionamiento normal.
e . Si el producto se ha caído o se ha dañado de alguna manera.
f . Cuando el producto exhiba un cambio evidente en su rendimiento
(esto indica la necesidad de asistencia técnica).
21. Piezas de recambio – Cuando sean necesarias piezas de
sustitución, asegúrese de que el personal de servicio técnico ha
utilizado las especificadas por el fabricante o que cuenten con
las mismas características que las originales. Las sustituciones
no autorizadas pueden provocar incendios, descargas eléctricas
u otros peligros.
22. Comprobación de seguridad – Después de haber finalizado
cualquier servicio técnico o de reparación de este producto,
solicite al técnico que realice comprobaciones de seguridad para
determinar que el producto se encuentra en condiciones de
funcionamiento.
23. Calor – Este aparato deberá situarse alejado de fuentes de calor
como, por ejemplo, radiadores, salidas de calor, estufas y otros
aparatos que produzcan calor (incluyendo amplificadores).
121
Guía de operación rápida en español
5
Conexión básica
La conexión siguiente es la conexión básica para ver o
grabar programas de TV.
Conecte los enchufes de salida VIDEO/
AUDIO en su VCR, a los enchufes de entrada
de VIDEO/AUDIO en su TV usando un cable
de audio/video.
TV
Para los enchufes
Video/audio IN
Para los enchufes
Video/audio IN
Cable de
Video/audio
(includio)
4
Cable de
Video/audio
(disponible
comercialmente)
Cable coaxial
(disponible comercialmente)
Para el enchufe de
ebtrada de antena
5
3
Para el enchufe de
salida de antena
Después de la conexión
Conecte los cables de alimentación del TV y VCR. Luego
vaya "EZ Set Up".
EZ Set Up
IMPORTANTE (Precaución durante EZ Set Up):
• No pulse el botón POWER de la grabadora ni del
control remoto.
Para los enchufes de
salida del video/audio
VCR
POWER
Para el enchufe de
entrada de antena
2
Coaxial cable
(incluido)
La función de EZ Set Up ajusta automáticamente los canales
del sintonizador y el reloj cuando el cable de la antena está
conectado al panel trasero de la grabadora y la clavija del
cable de alimentación está conectada a una toma de CA.
Pala el enchufe
PASS THIROUGH
1
La grabadora
Para le enchufe IN
FROM ANTENNA
2
1
A la salida de pared
de anena/cable TV
Cable de antena
(disponible comercialmente)
1
2
3
Para los enchufes
de salida del
VIDEO/AUDIO
Conecte el cable de antena de TV al enchufe
IN FROM ANTENNA en la parte trasera de
esta grabadora.
Conecte el enchufe PASS THROUGH en la
parte trasera de esta grabadora, al enchufe
de entrada de antena en su VCR usando el
cable coaxial sumimistrado.
NOTA
• Si conecta esta grabadora directamente a su TV, omita el
paso siguiente.
3
4
Conecte el enchufe de salida de antena en
su VCR al enchufe de entrada de antena en
su TV, usando el cable coaxial.
Conecte los enchufes de salida VIDEO/AUDIO
en esta grabadora, a los enchufes de entrada
VIDEO/AUDIO en su TV usando el cable de
video/audio suministrado.
Asegúrese de que los colores de los enchufes y
clavijas coincidan cuando conecta el cable.
122
Asegúrese de que el cable de la antena esté
conectado. Para conocer la configuración de
la conexión, consulte “Conexión básica”.
Conecte el enchufe de alimentación de la
grabadora un tomacorriente y el reloj de CA.
Los canales del sintonizador se ajustarán
automáticamente.
• Esta grabadora puede controlar y utilizar señales
horarias (señales EDS), emitidas por algunos
canales de televisión, para poner automáticamente
en hora el reloj.
NOTA
• Si la alimentación se suministra a la grabadora antes de
que el cable se encuentre conectado, EZ Setup Up no
podrá preajustar los canales en la memoria. Si esto llega
a suceder, pulse RESET en la parte delantera de la
grabadora. La función EZ Set Up volverá a funcionar
nuevamente.
• Si se conecta la alimentación durante EZ Set Up, el
ajuste automático de los canales se interrumpirá y los
canales del sintonizador no podrán ser preajustados.
• La Puesta en Hora Automática del Reloj puede tardar
varios minutos.
Guía de operación rápida en español
Antes de utilizar la grabadora
1
4
• Empieza la grabación y se visualiza
el icono REC.
• El indicador REC (para HDD) de la
parte delantera de la grabadora se
enciende en rojo durante la
grabación.
Coencte la alimentación del
televisor.
• Cuando la grabadora esté conectada
a otro equipo de audio, encienda
también ese equipo.
• Cambie la entrada de TV a la entrada
de AV utilizada para conectar la
grabadora.
2
Grabación directa en HDD
1
3
Pulse los botones Number o CH
" para seleccionar el canal
'/"
que va a grabar.
Pulse REC MODE para
seleccionar el modo de
grabación.
1 / 1
1 / 1
0 0 : 2 0 : 3 0
5
6
SP
TP
FP
Pulse REC PAUSE para hacer
una pausa en la grabación.
• La pausa de grabación no funciona
durante la reproducción de
persecución.
• Durante la pausa, el indicador REC
(para HDD) en la parte delantera de
la grabadora parpadea.
Pulse REC PAUSE para reanudar
la grabación.
Icono REC PAUSE
7
Pulse REC STOP para detener la
grabación.
Grabación directa en DVD
1
• El modo de grabación cambia como
se muestra abajo cada vez que se
pulsa el botón.
FINE
HD D
OR IG IN AL
F I NE REST. 19h8m
Pulse HDD para seleccionar el
modo HDD.
• El botón HDD de la parte delantera
de la grabadora se enciende.
• El modo HDD se selecciona
automáticamente cuando se conecta
la alimentación.
2
Icono REC
REC
Pulse POWER para encender la
grabadora.
• Cuando se conecte la alimentación
de la grabadora por primera vez
después de adquirirla, siguiendo EZ
Set Up, se visualizará la pantalla OSD
LANGUAGE Select y la función Guía
de conexión se activará.
Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla.
Pulse Æ REC mientras se ven
emisiones.
Pulse OPEN/CLOSE en la
grabadora para abrir la bandeja
del disco.
OPEN/CLOSE
MNgg
• El modo de grabación establecido
seleccionando “MN x x” es el modo
de grabación establecido en la
pantalla de selección MANUAL REC
MODE.
2
Ponga un disco DVD-RW o DVD-R
en la bandeja del disco.
• Introduzca el disco con la cara de la
etiqueta hacia arriba.
• En el caso de un disco grabado en
ambas caras, ponga la cara que
quiera grabar hacia abajo.
123
Guía de operación rápida en español
3
Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar
la bandeja del disco.
4
Pulse DVD para seleccionar el
modo DVD.
• El botón DVD de la parte delantera
de la grabadora se enciende.
• El modo HDD se selecciona
automáticamente cuando se conecta
la alimentación.
5
6
Pulse los botones Number o CH
" para seleccionar el canal
'/"
que va a grabar.
Pulse REC MODE para
seleccionar el modo de grabació
n
deseado.
• El modo de grabación cambia como
se muestra abajo cada vez que se
pulsa el botón.
FINE
SP
TP
FP
Reproducción HDD
1
• El botón HDD de la parte delantera
de la grabadora se enciende.
• El modo HDD se selecciona
automáticamente cuando se conecta
la alimentación.
NOTA
• Para reproducir una lista de reproducción
creada por edición, pulse ORIGINAL /
PLAY LIST.
Cada vez que se pulse este botón, el
ajuste cambiará entre “ORIGINAL” (títulos
originales” y “PLAY LIST”..
2
MNgg
Pulse Æ REC.
• Empieza la grabación y se visualiza
el icono REC.
• El indicador REC (para DVD) de la
parte delantera de la grabadora se
enciende en rojo durante la
grabación.
DVD-RW
REC
OR IG INAL VR
F I NE REST. 1h0m
1 / 1
1 / 1
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 1
8
Pulse REC PAUSE para hacer
una pausa en la grabació
n.
• La pausa no funcionará durante la
grabación con temporizador.
• Durante la pausa, el indicador REC
(para DVD) en la parte delantera de
la grabadora parpadea.
9
Pulse REC PAUSE para reanudar
la grabació
n.
10 Pulse REC STOP para detener la
grabació
n.
124
Pulse | PLAY.
• El indicador PLAY (para HDD) en la
parte delantera de la grabadora se
enciende en verde durante la
reproducción.
• Para avanzar o retroceder
FWD o
rápidamente: Presione
REV durante la reproducción.
Cada vez que se pulsen estos
botones, la velocidad cambiará entre
los ajustes siguientes
• El modo de grabación establecido
seleccionando “MN x x” es el modo
de grabación establecido en la
pantalla de selección MANUAL REC
MODE.
7
Pulse HDD para seleccionar el
modo HDD.
(2X aproximadamente) (8X aproximadamente) (32X aproximadamente)
Pulse | PLAY para volver a la
reproducción normal.
3
Para detener la reproducción,
pulse ■ STOP/LIVE.
Función de reanudación
de la reproducción.
• Si pulsa | PLAY a continuación, la
reproducción se reanudará desde el punto
donde usted la detuvo la última vez. Para
reproducir desde el principio, cancele el
modo de reanudación pulsando ■ STOP/
LIVE y luego pulse | PLAY. (La
reanudación de la reproducción se
cancelará cuando usted abra o cierre la
bandeja del disco, desconecte la
alimentación o cambie a HDD.)
Guía de operación rápida en español
Reproducción DVD-RW/R
DVD RW
DVD RW
VR MODE
VIDEO MODE
1
DVD R
Pulse OPEN/CLOSE en la
grabadora para abrir la bandeja
del disco.
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
2
8
Ponga el disco que quiera
reproducir en la bandeja del
disco.
Para detener la reproducción,
pulse ■ STOP/LIVE.
Función de reanudación
de la reproducción.
• Si pulsa | PLAY a continuación, la
reproducción se reanudará desde el punto
donde usted la detuvo la última vez. Para
reproducir desde el principio, cancele el
modo de reanudación pulsando ■ STOP/
LIVE y luego pulse | PLAY. (La
reanudación de la reproducción se
cancelará cuando usted abra o cierre la
bandeja del disco, desconecte la
alimentación o cambie a HDD.)
• La función de reanudación de la
reproducción no se activa durante la
reproducción de CDs de vídeo.
Reproducción de DVD Vídeo
DVD VIDEO
•Introduzca el disco con la cara de la
etiqueta hacia arriba.
•En el caso de un disco grabado en
ambas caras, ponga la cara que
quiera ver hacia abajo.
3
Pulse OPEN/CLOSE para cerrar
la bandeja del disco.
4
Pulse DVD para seleccionar el
modo DVD.
1
2
Pulse REC LIST para visualizar
la pantalla REC LIST (imágenes
miniatura).
•Si el disco introducido tiene una lista
de reproducción y usted pulsa
ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST, la pantalla
cambiará a la lista de reproducción.
6
"/\
\ / | para seleccionar
Pulse '/"
el título (o capítulo) que quiera
ver.
LISTA DE GRABCIONES(HDD ORIG.)
12 / 25 SÃB 10 : 28 AM
TÎTULO: CH33 FINE
INF TÎTULO: 10/4 MON 4:00 PM – 4:10 PM
1
2
4
7
• El botón DVD de la parte delantera
de la grabadora se enciende.
• La reproducción puede empezar
automáticamente dependiendo del
disco.
Pulse | PLAY.
• La reproducción empieza desde el
primer título.
• El menú tal vez se visualice en primer
lugar dependiendo del disco. Haga la
operación de reproducción siguiendo
las indicaciones de la pantalla.
• Para detener la reproducción, pulse
■ STOP/LIVE.
•El botón DVD de la parte delantera
de la grabadora se enciende.
•El modo HDD se selecciona
automáticamente cuando se conecta
la alimentación.
5
Pulse DVD e introduzca un disco.
Reproducción de Audio CD/Vídeo CD
VIDEO CD
1
AUDIO CD
Pulse DVD e introduzca un disco.
• El botón DVD de la parte delantera
de la grabadora se enciende.
2
Pulse | PLAY.
• La reproducción empieza desde la
primera pista.
3
Para detener la reproducción,
pulse ■ STOP/LIVE.
3
5
6
Pulse SET/ENTER.
125
CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY
(Valid for warranty service in the U.S. only)
CONSUMER LIMITED WARRANTY
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION warrants to the first consumer purchaser that this Sharp brand product (the
“Product”), when shipped in its original container, will be free from defective workmanship and materials, and agrees
that it will, at its option, either repair the defect or replace the defective Product or part thereof with a new or
remanufactured equivalent at no charge to the purchaser for parts or labor for the period(s) set forth below.
This warranty does not apply to any appearance items of the Product nor to the additional excluded item(s) set forth
below nor to any Product the exterior of which has been damaged or defaced, which has been subjected to improper
voltage or other misuse, abnormal service or handling, or which has been altered or modified in design or
construction.
In order to enforce the rights under this limited warranty, the purchaser should follow the steps set forth below and
provide proof of purchase to the servicer.
The limited warranty described herein is in addition to whatever implied warranties may be granted to purchasers by
law. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE
ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD(S) FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE SET FORTH BELOW. Some states do not allow
limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
Neither the sales personnel of the seller nor any other person is authorized to make any warranties other than those
described herein, or to extend the duration of any warranties beyond the time period described herein on behalf of
Sharp.
The warranties described herein shall be the sole and exclusive warranties granted by Sharp and shall be the sole
and exclusive remedy available to the purchaser. Correction of defects, in the manner and for the period of time
described herein, shall constitute complete fulfillment of all liabilities and responsibilities of Sharp to the purchaser
with respect to the Product, and shall constitute full satisfaction of all claims, whether based on contract, negligence,
strict liability or otherwise. In no event shall Sharp be liable, or in any way responsible, for any damages or defects in
the Product which were caused by repairs or attempted repairs performed by anyone other than an authorized
servicer. Nor shall Sharp be liable or in any way responsible for any incidental or consequential economic or property
damage. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion may
not apply to you.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY
FROM STATE TO STATE.
Model Specific Section
Your Product Model Number & Description:
DV-HR300U DVD RECORDER WITH HARD DISC
(Be sure to have this information available when you need service
for your Product.)
Warranty Period for this Product:
One (1) year parts and ninety (90) days labor from date of purchase.
Additional Item(s) Excluded from
Warranty Coverage (if any):
Non-rechargeable batteries.
Where to Obtain Service:
From a Sharp Authorized Servicer located in the United States. To
find the location of the nearest Sharp Authorized Servicer, call Sharp
toll free at 1-800-BE-SHARP.
What to do to Obtain Service:
Ship prepaid or carry in your Product to a Sharp Authorized Servicer.
Be sure to have Proof of Purchase available. If you ship the Product, be sure it is insured and packaged securely.
TO OBTAIN SUPPLY, ACCESSORY OR PRODUCT INFORMATION, GO TO OUR WEBSITE AT www.sharpusa.com
OR CALL 1-800-BE-SHARP.
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
Sharp Plaza, Mahwah, New Jersey 07430-2135
SHARP CORPORATION
Osaka, Japan
Printed in Malaysia
Impreso en Malaysia
TINS-A914WJZZ B
03P12-MSK
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement